RCS-LX60D - AWE Europe

RCS-LX60D 

SX-LX60D 

SSP-LX60D 

DVR-LX60D 

Operating Instructions 

Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer 

Speaker System 

HDD/DVD Recorder 

Discover the benefits of registering your product online at 

http://www.pioneer.co.uk (or http://www.pioneer.eu) 

® 

®

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. 

Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly. 

After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference. 

IMPORTANT 

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, 

within an equilateral triangle, is intended to 

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated 

"dangerous voltage" within the product's 

enclosure that may be of sufficient 

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric 

shock to persons. 

WARNING 

This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire 

or shock hazard, do not place any container filed 

with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or 

flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain 

or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En 

This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive 

(73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives 

(89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and 

93/68/EEC). D3-4-2-1-9a_En 

POWER-CORD CAUTION 

Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the 

plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power 

cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a 

short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a 

piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the 

cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other 

cords. The power cords should be routed such that they 

are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord 

can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check 

the power cord once in a while. When you find it 

damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized 

service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En 

CAUTION 

This product is a class 1 laser product, but this 

product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. 

To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers 

or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. 

Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. 

The following caution label appears on your unit. 

Location: inside of the HDD/DVD Recorder 

CAUTION 

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK 

DO NOT OPEN 

CAUTION: 

TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC 

SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR 

BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS 

INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED 

SERVICE PERSONNEL. 

The exclamation point within an equilateral 

triangle is intended to alert the user to the 

presence of important operating and 

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the 

literature accompanying the appliance. 

D3-4-2-1-1_En-A 

WARNING 

Before plugging in for the first time, read the following 

section carefully. 

The voltage of the available power supply differs 

according to country or region. Be sure that the 

power supply voltage of the area where this unit 

will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230V 

or 120V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En 

Operating Environment 

Operating environment temperature and humidity: 

+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH 

(cooling vents not blocked) 

Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in 

locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or 

strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En 

This product is for general household purposes. Any 

failure due to use for other than household purposes 

(such as long-term use for business purposes in a 

restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which 

requires repair will be charged for even during the 

warranty period. K041_En 

D3-4-2-1-8_B_En

If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC 

outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed 

and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and 

mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of 

this unit should be performed only by qualified 

service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the 

cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make 

sure it is properly disposed of after removal. 

The equipment should be disconnected by removing 

the mains plug from the wall socket when left 

unused for a long period of time (for example, when 

on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En 

CAUTION 

The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not 

completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. 

Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect 

device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from 

the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, 

make sure the unit has been installed so that the 

power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC 

outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, 

the power cord should also be unplugged from the 

AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time 

(for example, when on vacation). 

WARNING 

To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked 

flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the 

equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En 

If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used 

electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling. 

Private households in the member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to 

designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one). 

For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal. 

By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential 

negative effects on the environment and human health. K058_En 

Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified 

service personnel. 

IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG 

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the 

fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362. 

Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse. 

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug 

must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer. 

If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of 

safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket. 

If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician. 

IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: 

Blue : Neutral Brown : Live 

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in 

your plug, proceed as follows ; 

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the 

letter N or coloured BLACK. 

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the 

letter L or coloured RED. 

How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse. 

VENTILATION CAUTION (Receiver subwoofer) 

When installing this unit, make sure to leave space 

around the unit for ventilation to improve heat 

radiation (at least 5 cm at top, 5 cm at rear, and 5 

cm at each side). 

VENTILATION CAUTION (HDD/DVD Recorder) 

When installing this unit, make sure to leave space 

around the unit for ventilation to improve heat 

radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 

10 cm at each side). 

WARNING 

Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for 

ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the 

product, and to protect it from overheating. To 

prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be 

blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, 

table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the 

equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En 

5 cm 

5 cm 5 cm 

10 cm 

10 cm 10 cm 

Receiver subwoofer HDD/DVD Recorder 

D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En

4 

En 

Section One 

Contents 

Section One 

What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 

01 Speaker Setup Guide 

Safety precautions when setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 

Home theater sound setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 

Front surround setup (recommended) . . . . . . . . . . . 6 

Standard surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 

Wall mounting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 

Before mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 

Additional notes on speaker placement . . . . . . . . . . . 9 

02 Connecting up 

Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 

Using this system for TV audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 

03 Controls and displays 

Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 

HDD/DVD Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 

Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 

Inserting a CA module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 

Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 

Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 

Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . 21 

04 Before you start 

Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 

Setting up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 

Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 

Watching a DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 

Listening to a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 

Watching a title recorded on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . 23 

Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 

05 Getting started 

System demo setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 

Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal 

surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 

06 Listening to your system 

Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 

Listening in surround sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 

Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 

Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . 27 

Using Advanced Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 

Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 

Using the Sound Retriever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 

Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ. . . . . . . . . . . 28 

Enhancing dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 

Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes . . . . . . . 28 

Adjusting the bass and treble. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 

Boosting the bass level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 

07 Listening to the radio 

Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 

Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 

Improving poor AM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 

Changing the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 

Memorizing stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 

Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 

Using RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 

Displaying RDS information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 

Searching for RDS programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 

08 Surround sound settings 

Using the Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 

Channel level setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 

Speaker distance setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 

Dynamic Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 

Dual mono setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 

Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone. . . . 32 

09 Other connections 

Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 

Connecting an analog audio component . . . . . . . . 33 

Listening to an external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 

Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 

Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma display . . . . . 34 

SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays. . . . . . . . . 35 

Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer 

plasma display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 

10 Additional information 

Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 

DTS CD setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 

Setting the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 

Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 

Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 

Hints on installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 

Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 

Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 

Section Two 

Operating instructions for HDD/DVD 

Recorder (DVR-LX60D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Section One 

What’s in the box 

Please confirm that the following items are all supplied. 

Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX60D) box: 

Remote control (page 18) 

AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) x2 

(page 21) 

Display unit (page 15) 

Power cord (page 12) 

AM loop antenna (page 10) 

FM wire antenna (page 10) 

Control cable (page 10) 

Display cable (page 10) 

Coaxial cable (page 10) 

Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) (page 24) 

Non-skid pads (large) x4 (page 7) 

Spacers x2 (page 11) 

These operating instructions 

Warranty card 

HDD/DVD recorder (DVR-LX60D) box: 

Remote control 

AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2 

Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) (page 14) 

G-LINK cable (page 51) 

RF antenna cable x 2 (page 14) 

Power cord (page 14) 

Operating instructions 

Warranty card 

Speakers (SSP-LX60D) box: 

Speakers (front x2, surround x2, center x2) (page 12) 

Speaker cables x5 (page 12) 

Non-skid pads (small) x24 (page 7) 

Brackets x2 (page 7) 

Spiral wrap x2 (page 13) 

Screws x8 (page 7) 

5 

En

01 

6 

En 

Speaker Setup Guide 

Chapter 1 


Safety precautions when setting up 

When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on 

their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a 

stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing 

the speakers. 

If the speakers are to be used in a stacked configuration, 

always use the provided brackets to secure them 

together (page 7, 8). 

Home theater sound setup 

Most 5.1 channel home theater systems are designed so 

that speakers are placed to surround the listener’s 

position as shown in the illustration. Such designs, 

however, produce the undesirable effect of forcing the 

center speaker to be mounted above or below the 

television monitor, and require room for the surround 

speakers. 

Surround left 

Front left Front right 

Center 

Bass 

Surround right 

The present system, however, features Pioneer’s 

proprietary New Front Surround technology and Dual 

Center Speakers, using only two speaker positions (to 

right and left of television as shown in the illustration) in 

order to provide full home theater sound while greatly 

simplifying the issue of speaker placement. 

Surround left 

Front left 

Center 

Front right 

Bass 


Front surround setup (recommended) 

This recommended method places the surround 

speakers in front, to simplify the issue of speaker 

placement in the room. The center speakers can be 

placed in independently in the center if desired. 

Surround 

left 

Center 

Front 

left 

Listening position 

*When center speakers are placed in the center. 

Surround 

left 

Front 

left 

Center 

Surround 

right 

Center 

Front 

right 

Surround 

right 

Front 

right 

Receiver 

subwoofer

Speaker Setup Guide 01 

1 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of 

each of the front, center and surround speakers. The 

four large non-skid pads are for the receiver 

subwoofer (as shown). 

Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the 

base (flat surface) of each speaker. 

2 Stack the speakers and fix with the brackets. 

Each speaker is provided with a color-coded indicator on 

the model label on the rear side to assist identification. 

Refer to the color indicators and install the speakers 

correctly. 

Model label 

Non-skid pads 

(small) x 24 

Non-skid pads 

(large) x 4 

Color indicator 

Front, Center and Surround speakers 

Left 

Blue 

Green 

White 

Receiver subwoofer 

Surround speaker 

Center speaker 

Front speaker 

Right 

Gray 

Green 

Red 

As shown in the illustration, stack the speakers from the 

bottom up in the order front speaker, center speaker, 

surround speaker. Align the bracket with the respective 

upper screw hole on the back of the front speaker, the 

two screw holes on the center speaker, and the bottom 

screw hole on the surround speaker, and fasten the 

screws securely. 



Front speaker 

When placing the center speakers independently, stack 

the front speaker on the bottom and the surround 

speaker on top, then align the 1st and 3rd screw holes 

from the top of the bracket with the upper screw holes on 

the back of the speakers, and fasten the two securely. 


Front speaker 

Bracket 

Bracket 

Screw 

Screw 

Caution 

Do not attempt to carry the speakers when they are 

connected with the bracket. Doing so may cause 

damage to the bracket or worsen damage to the 

bracket and speakers in the event they are dropped. 

3 Connect the speaker system. 

Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly. 

After connecting everything, place the speakers as 

shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound. 

After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup 

(page 24) to complete your surround sound setup. 

7 

En

01 

8 

En 


Standard surround setup 

This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker 

setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound. 

The center speakers can be installed independently in 

the center if desired. 

Center 

Front 

left 

Surround left 

*When center speakers are placed in the center. 

Front 

left 

1 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of 

each of the front, center and surround speakers. The 

four large non-skid pads are for the receiver 

subwoofer (as shown). 

Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the 

base (flat surface) of each speaker. 

Non-skid pads 

(small) x 24 

Non-skid pads 

(large) x 4 


Center 

Center 

Front 

right 

Receiver 

subwoofer 


Front 

right 

Front, Center and Surround speakers 


2 (When mounting center speakers to right and 

left) Stack the speakers and fix with the bracket. 

Each speaker is provided with a color-coded indicator on 

the model label on the rear side to assist identification. 

Refer to the color indicators and install the speakers 

correctly. 

Model label 

As shown in the illustration, stack the speakers with the 

front speaker on the bottom and center speaker on top, 

then align the 1st and 3rd screw holes from the top of the 

bracket with the upper screw holes on the back of the 

speakers, and fasten the two securely. 


Front speaker 

Color indicator 

Left 

Green 

White 


Front speaker 

Bracket 

Screw 

Right 

Green 

Caution 

Do not attempt to carry the speakers when they are 

connected with the bracket. Doing so may cause 

damage to the bracket or worsen damage to the 

bracket and speakers in the event they are dropped. 

3 Connect the speaker system. 

Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly. 

After connecting everything, place the speakers as 

shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound. 

After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup 

(page 24) to complete your surround sound setup. 

Red

Speaker Setup Guide 01 

Wall mounting the speakers 

The front, center and surround speakers have a 

mounting hole which can be used to mount the speaker 

on the wall. 

Before mounting 

Remember that the speaker system is heavy and that 

its weight could cause the screws to work loose, or 

the wall material to fail to support it, resulting in the 

speaker falling. Make sure that the wall you intend to 

mount the speakers on is strong enough to support 

them. Do not mount on plywood or soft surface walls. 

Mounting screws are not supplied. Use screws 

suitable for the wall material and support the weight 

of the speaker. 

Caution 

If you are unsure of the qualities and strength of the 

wall, consult a professional for advice. 

Pioneer is not responsible for any accidents or 

damage that result from improper installation. 

5 mm to 7 mm 

5 mm 

10 mm 

Additional notes on speaker placement 

Install the main front left and right speakers at an 

equal distance from the TV. 

When using the Front surround setup, separate the 

left and right speakers by about 1.5 m for optimum 

effect. 

When using the Standard surround setup, install the 

surround speakers slightly above ear level for 

optimum effect. 

Precautions: 

When installing the center speaker on top of the TV, 

be sure to secure it with tape or some other suitable 

means. Otherwise, the speaker may fall from the TV 

due to external shocks such as earthquakes, 

endangering those nearby or damaging the speaker. 

The front (x2), center (x2) and surround (x2) speakers 

supplied with this system are magnetically shielded. 

However, depending on the installation location, 

color distortion may occur if the speaker is installed 

extremely close to the screen of a television set. If this 

happens, turn the power switch of the television set 

OFF, and turn it ON after 15 min to 30 min. If the 

problem persists, place the speaker system away 

from the television set. 

The receiver subwoofer is not magnetically shielded 

and so should not be placed near a TV or monitor. 

Magnetic storage media (such as floppy discs and 

tape or video cassettes) should also not be kept close 

to the receiver subwoofer. 

Do not attach the receiver subwoofer to the wall or 

ceiling. They may fall off and cause injury. 

For safety, make sure that there is no exposed bare 

speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals. 

Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other 

amplifier. This may result in malfunction or fire. 

Do not connect any speakers other than those 

supplied to this system. 

9 

En

02 

10 

En 

Connecting up 

Chapter 2 

Connecting up 

Basic connections 

Important 

When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power 

cord from the wall socket. 

After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket. 

Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX60D) 

USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT. 

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. 

AC IN 

CENTER R FRONT L 

ANTENNA 

MCACC 

SETUP MIC CONTROL IN 

SYSTEM CONNECTOR CONTROL 

DVD/DVR1 

OUT SUBWOOFER 

SURROUND 

(COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 

FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ANTENNA 

AUDIO INPUT 

DIGITAL 

SPEAKERS 

DIGITAL ANALOG 

R L 

(OPTICAL) (OPTICAL) 

Note 

When using the display unit in a wall-mounted 

location, take full precautions to prevent the unit 

from accidentally falling. 

Screws and other fixtures for use in wall mounting 

are not included. 

L 

R 

AUDIO VIDEO 

ANTENNA 

R 

L 

IN 

S-VIDEO 

INPUT 3 

AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) 

OUT 

Y PB PR 

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 

b Coaxial cable 

a Control cable 

Display cable 

FM antenna 

4 

OUTPUT 

2 

AV 1 (RGB) ñ TV 

G-LINK IN 

CONTROL 

3 

AM loop antenna 

ANTENNA(DIGITAL) 

OUT 

IN 

5 V 30 mA 

1 

HDD/DVD Recorder (DVR-LX60D) 

HDMI OUT 

DIGITAL 

AUDIO OUT 

WARNING 

Pioneer bears no responsibility for accidents 

resulting from faulty assembly or installation, 

insufficient mounting strength of walls, mounting 

fixtures (or other building fixtures), misuse or natural 

disasters. 

COAXIAL 

AC IN 

Display unit

Connecting up 02 

1 Connect the HDD/DVD recorder to the receiver 

subwoofer. 

a. Plug the control cable into the CONTROL OUT jack 

on the rear of the receiver subwoofer. 

Plug the other end of the cable into the CONTROL IN 

jack on the rear of the HDD/DVD recorder. 

b. Plug the coaxial cable into the DIGITAL AUDIO 

INPUT (DVD/DVR 1) jack on the rear of the receiver 

subwoofer. 

Plug the other end of the cable into the DIGITAL 

AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) jack on the rear of the HDD/ 

DVD recorder. 

Note that unless the control cable is connected, you 

can’t use the remote control with the HDD/DVD recorder. 

2 Fasten the spacers to the display unit and connect. 

If the display unit is difficult to view, the spacers can be 

attached to allow changing of the viewing angle. Peel off 

the protective paper from the spacers and press the 

spacers onto the depressions on the bottom of the display 

unit. 

Plug the L-shaped end of the display cable into the 

connector on the rear of the display unit, then plug the 

other end of the display cable into SYSTEM CONNECTOR 

jack on the receiver subwoofer. 

3 Assemble the AM loop antenna. 

a b c 

a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the arrow. 

b. Clip the loop onto the stand. 

c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform 

step b after first securing the stand with screws. 

It is recommended that you determine the reception 

strength before securing the stand with the screws. 

4 Connect the AM and FM antennas 1 . 

a. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM 

antenna terminal 2 . 

For each terminal, press down on the tab to open; 

insert the wire, then release to secure. 

b. Push the FM antenna 3 plug onto the center pin of the 

FM antenna socket. 

Note 

1 Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit, receiver subwoofer and HDD/DVD recorder. 

If reception with the supplied antenna is poor, see Improving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 29 or Connecting 

external antennas on page 34. 

Do not attach any antenna other than the provided loop antenna, or an external antenna as described on page 34. 

2 Don’t let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances. 

If radio reception is poor, you may be able improve it by re-inserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal. 

For best reception, do not untwist the AM loop antenna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna. 

3 To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit. 

1 

2 

11 

En

02 

12 

En 

Connecting up 

Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX60D) 

6 

MCACC 



DVD/DVR1 

OUT SUBWOOFER 

SURROUND 



AUDIO INPUT 

DIGITAL 

SPEAKERS 


R L 




8 

AC IN 


5 Connect each speaker. 

The front and surround speaker cables have a colorcoded 

connector at one end and two bare wires at the 

other end. 

Since there is only one terminal to connect the two 

center speakers, you will need to use the supplied Ycable 

for the connection. 

Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire. 

Connect the wires to the speaker. Each speaker in the 

illustration can be identified by means of the colorcoded 

indicator provided on the rear-surface model 

label. Match the color-coded wire with the color 

indicator on the model label, then insert the colorcoded 

wire into the red (+) side and the other wire 

into the black (–) side. 

ANTENNA 

5 

Color-coded connector 

(Connect to rear panel) 

L 

R 

To AC outlet 

Color-coded wire 

(Connect to speaker) 


(Gray) 

Center 

(Green) 

Front right 

(Red) 


Y-cable 

Speaker system (SSP-LX60D) 

Surround left 

(Blue) 

Center 

(Green) 

Front left 

(White) 

When connecting the center speakers, connect the Ycable 

dual end to the two center speakers in the 

same way. 

Y-cable 

To Receiver subwoofer 

Connect the other end to the color-coded speaker 

terminals on the rear of the receiver subwoofer. Make 

sure to insert completely. 

The small lug at the wire-end of the speaker plug 

should face up or down depending on whether it’s 

being plugged into one of the upper or lower speaker 

terminals. Please make sure to connect correctly. 

Upper terminal Lower terminal

Connecting up 02 

When connections are completed, adjust the cable 

placements. If the speakers have been fixed with the 

brackets, fix the cable to the groove in the brackets as 

shown. 

Fasten the cables together with the spiral wrap. 

Hold multiple cables together and place the wrap 

over the cables from the end. 

Wrap the spiral wrap with the cables in the center. 

The spiral wrap may be cut at a desired length. 

6 Connect the subwoofer cable. 

Just below the subwoofer speaker, to the left of 

center, you should see the subwoofer connecting 

cable. Plug this into the SUBWOOFER SPEAKER 

terminal. 

Caution 

These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE 

voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when 

connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, 

disconnect the power cord before touching any 

uninsulated parts. 

Do not connect any speakers other than those 

supplied to this system. 

Do not connect the supplied speakers to any 

amplifier other than the one supplied with this 

system. Connection to any other amplifier may result 

in malfunction or fire. 

The center speakers and front/surround speakers are 

designed with different impedance values. Be sure to 

identify and connect the speakers correctly since 

improper connections may result in degraded sound 

or operation. 

13 

En

02 

14 

En 

Connecting up 

ANTENNA 

OUT 

7 

RF antenna cable 

ANTENNA 

R 

IN 

AUDIO L VIDEO 

S-VIDEO 

INPUT 3 

OUT 


ANTENNA 

IN 

Y PB PR 



AV 1 (RGB) ñ TV 

G-LINK IN 

7 Connect the HDD/DVD recorder to your TV. 1 

Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input on 

your TV. 

Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable 

for the video connection. 

Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the 

corresponding audio inputs on your TV. 

Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/ 

video cable for the audio connection. Make sure you 

match the left and right outputs with their 

corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. 

See Connecting a TV antenna on page 49 to connect 

the antenna. 

8 Connect the power cord. 2 

Connect the power cord to AC inlet on the receiver 

subwoofer and HDD/DVD recorder. Connect the 

power cord to a wall socket. 

Using this system for TV audio 

If your TV has a stereo audio output you can connect it to 

this system and enjoy surround TV sound. 

Important 

When connecting this system, be sure to switch 

power off and disconnect the power cord from the 

wall socket. Connect the power cord to the wall 

socket only after completing all other connections. 

7 

OUTPUT 

Audio/video cable 

(red/white/yellow) 

To Video input 

To Audio input 

To Antenna in 

Antenna wall outlet 

7 

CONTROL 



OUT 

IN 

5 V 30 mA 

DIGITAL 

AUDIO OUT ANTENNA 

(DIGITAL) IN 

Note 

1 Other types of video connection are possible. See page 50 to page 52 for more on this. 

2 Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system. 

Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system. 

HDMI OUT 



AC IN 

COAXIAL 

TV 



or indoor antenna 


(DVR-LX60D) 

8 

MCACC 



DVD/DVR1 

OUT SUBWOOFER 

SURROUND 


AUDIO INPUT 

DIGITAL 

SPEAKERS 


R L 


1 Connect the audio output jacks on your TV to the 

ANALOG AUDIO INPUT jacks on the receiver 

subwoofer. 

Use the red/white stereo audio cable (not supplied) for 

this connection. Make sure you match the left and right 

outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct 

stereo sound. 

You can use the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT jacks for 

any analog source you want, such as a tape deck, etc. 

L 

R 

AC IN 

To AC outlet 

To Audio output 

TV 

1

Controls and displays 03 

Chapter 3 

Controls and displays 

Display unit 

1 STANDBY/ON 

Press to switch the system on/into standby. 

2 Front panel display 

See below for details. 

3 IR remote sensor (page 20) 

Display 

1 DTS 

Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 26). 

2 F.SURR. 

Lights when one of the Front Stage Surround 

Advance listening modes is selected (page 27). 

SURR. 

Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening 

modes is selected (page 27). 

3 SOUND 

Lights when Sound Retriever is active (page 27). 

4 Tuner indicators 

– Lights when a broadcast is being received. 

– Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being 

received in auto stereo mode. 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

4 AUDIO INPUT (page 33) 

Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio 

inputs (DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2, DIGITAL or ANALOG). 

5 SURROUND 

Use to select a Surround mode (page 26). 

6 VOLUME +/– buttons 

Use to adjust the volume. 

1 

2 3 

SOUND 

DTS F.SURR. 

2D 

2PL 

kHz 

MHz 

9 8 7 

6 

5 4 

– Lights when FM mono reception is selected. 

– Lights when in one of the RDS display or search 

modes. 

5 kHz/MHz 

Indicates the frequency unit shown in the character 

display (kHz for AM, MHz for FM). 

6 Character display 

7 

Lights when sleep timer is active (page 36). 

8 2 PL II 

Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 26). 

9 2 D 

Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source (page 26). 

15 

En

03 

16 

En 



1 

HDD/DVD 

1 A.TV indicator 

Lights when analog TV is selected. 

D.TV indicator 

Lights when digital TV is selected. 

PLTV indicator 

Lights during recording started using the Pause Live 

TV feature. 

DivX indicator 

Lights during DivX playback. 

COPY indicator 

Lights when copying is underway. 

2 HDD/DVD 

Press to switch between HDD and DVD for recording and 

playback. 

3 Disc tray 

4 HDD/DVD indicator 

Indicator lights blue when the hard disk (HDD) is 

selected; orange when the DVD drive is selected. 

5 OPEN/CLOSE 

Press to open/close the disc tray. 

A.TV D.TV PLTV DivX COPY HDMI 

STANDBY/ON DV IN 

USB 

6 HDMI indicator 

Lights when this recorder is connected to HDMI (HDCP) 

compatible component. 

7 Front panel display 

See Display on page 17 for details. 

8 STANDBY/ON 

Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 

9 Front panel inputs 

See Front panel connections on page 49 for more 

information on these. 

2 3 4 5 6 

COMMON INTERFACE 

CH 

OPEN/CLOSE 

STOP REC 

INPUT 

SELECT 

8 9 10 11 

ONE TOUCH 

COPY 

A.TV/D.TV 

INPUT 2 S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO REC 

10 COMMON INTERFACE slot 

Slot for CA module and smart card used to decode 

scrambled D.TV channels. See Common Interface on 

page 17. 

11 

Press to start or restart playback. 

 

Press to stop playback. 

STOP REC 

Press to stop recording. 

ONE TOUCH COPY 

Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently 

playing title to DVD or the HDD. 

CH +/– 

Use to change channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc. 

INPUT SELECT 

Press to change the input used for recording. 

A.TV/D.TV 

Switches between analog TV antenna input and 

digital TV antenna input. The A.TV and D.TV 

indicators show which is selected. 

12 REC 

Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the 

recording time in 30 minute blocks. 

7 

9 

12


Display 

1 

Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused. 

2 

Lights when copying. 

1 

8 7 

3 

Lights during recording; blinks when recording is paused. 

4 (page 86) 

Lights when a timer recording has been set. 

(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but 

there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has 

been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.) 

NTSC 

Lights when the video output signal format is NTSC. 

(page 140) 

Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast 

are recorded. 

(page 139) 

Lights when the component video output is set to 

progressive scan. 

VPS/PDC (page 86) 

Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a 

VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording. 

5 Recording quality indicators (page 83) 

XP 

Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (high 

quality). 

SP 

Lights when the recording mode is set to SP 

(standard play). 

LP/SLP 

Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long 

play) or SLP (super-long play). 

EP/SEP 

Lights when the recording mode is set to EP 

(extended play) or SEP (super-extended play). 

MN 

Lights when the recording mode is set to MN 

(manual recording level) mode. 

2 3 4 5 

6 

L R P 

6 Character display 

7 R/RW 

Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW disc is 

loaded. 

8 PL (page 105) 

Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the 

recorder is in Play List mode. 

2 3 (page 145) 

Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is 

displayed, the remote control mode is 1). 

V 

Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is 

loaded. 

Common Interface 

To receive scrambled D.TV channels you will need a CA 

module and smart card provided by your service provider. 

Different CA modules support different encryption 

systems. This recorder is designed to work with modules 

that support the DVB standard. Contact your service 

provider to obtain the right kind of CA module. 

Note that neither CA modules nor smart cards are 

supplied or sold by Pioneer. 

Inserting a CA module 

The Common Interface card slot is located on the front 

panel of the recorder. 

• Insert the CA module into the card slot as far as 

it will go. 

The Common Interface card slot accepts Type I and Type 

II PC Cards (PCMCIA cards). 

17 

En

03 

18 

En 


Remote control 

1 

3 

5 

6 

9 

12 

13 

15 

17 

19 

22 

27 

29 

RECORDER 

 

HDD/DVD FM/AM 

PAUSE PLAY STOP 

 

 

RECEIVER 

 

SOUND 

AUDIO IN RETRIEVER 

REC 

 

STOP REC HELP INFO 

TOP MENU 

DISC 

NAVIGATOR 

HOME MENU 

GUIDE 

CHANNEL 

CHANNEL 

A.TV / D.TV 

PREV NEXT 

 

AUDIO 

SUBTITLE 

ENTER 

ANGLE 

CM BACK 

CM SKIP 

RETURN/EXIT 

VOLUME 

MCACC 

/ / TIMER REC REC MODE 

 

SETUP / TUNE+ SR + ONE TOUCH COPY 

1 2 3 

/ ST- 

/ ST+ PAUSE LIVE TV 

F. S. SURR / TUNE- TEST TONE VIDEO IN 

SURROUND ADVANCED 

SOUND 

SLEEP CLEAR 

INPUT 

MAIN 

ENTER 

4 5 6 

7 8 

0 

CHANNEL 

SUB 

9 

VOLUME 

TEXT TV / DVD 

TV CONTROL 

OPEN OPEN 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 

RDS DISP 

2 

4 

7 

8 

10 

11 

14 

16 

18 

20 

21 

23 

24 

25 

26 

28 

Important 

Functions printed in green on the remote control are 

accessed by switching the MAIN/SUB switch 

to SUB. 

1 RECORDER 

Press to switch the recorder on or into standby. 

2 RECEIVER 

Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on or into standby. 

3 Input select buttons 

HDD/DVD (page 83) 

Press to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for 

recording and playback. The receiver subwoofer’s 

audio input is also switched to DVD/DVR1. 1 

MAIN 

SUB 

FM/AM (page 29) 

Press to select the built-in radio tuner. 

AUDIO IN (page 33) 

Press repeatedly to select one of the receiver 

subwoofer’s audio inputs (DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2, 

DIGITAL or ANALOG). 

4 SOUND RETRIEVER 

Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio 

sources (page 27). 

5 Playback controls (page 91) 

PAUSE 

Press to pause playback or recording. 

PLAY 

Press to start playback. 

STOP 


6 Recording controls (page 83) 

REC 

Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the 

recording time in blocks of 30 mins. 

When the red action button is visible in a GUIDE 

Plus+® screen, use for One-Button-Record. 

STOP REC 

Press to stop recording. 

7 INFO 

While watching D.TV, press to display information 

banner. 

Press to see additional information highlighted item in 

the EPG. 

8 HELP 

Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen. 

Note 

1 If the recorder is set to remote mode 2 or 3, the receiver subwoofer’s audio input will not be switched. See also Remote Control Mode on 

page 145.


9 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 94, 105) / TOP MENU 

(page 92) 

Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top 

menu if a DVD-Video or finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc 

is loaded. 

10 GUIDE 

Press to display the EPG screen; press again to exit. 

11 HOME MENU 

Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can 

navigate many functions of the system. 

12 /// and ENTER (Smart Jog) 

Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Rotate the 

Smart Jog to move the cursor up or down. Press 

ENTER to select the currently highlighted option. 

When using the Smart Jog, turn it lighty to avoid 

pressing down on the cursor keys. 

While watching D.TV press ENTER to display the 

Channel List screen. 

Rotate the Smart Jog when playback is paused to do 

a frame-by-frame search back/forward. 

CM BACK (commercial back) 

Turn the Smart Jog counter-clockwise during 

playback to skip progressively backward through the 

video playing. 

CM SKIP (commercial skip) 

Turn the Smart Jog clockwise during playback to 

skip progressively forward through the video playing. 

CHANNEL +/– (page 81) 

While stopped, turn the Smart Jog to change the 

channel of the built-in TV tuner. 

13 A.TV/D.TV 

Press to switch between analog TV antenna input and 

digital TV antenna input. The A.TV and D.TV indicators 

on the front panel show which is selected. 

14 RETURN/EXIT 

Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or 

display. 

Also press to exit the MHEG application. 

15 PREV / NEXT 

Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/track/ 

folder; or to display the previous or next menu page. 

When GUIDE Plus+® is displayed, use to display the 

previous/next page. 

16 VOLUME +/– 

Use to adjust the volume. 

17 GUIDE Plus+ Action buttons 

Use when an EPG screen is displayed or when tuned to a 

data channel of a digital broadcast. The function of each 

button will be described on-screen, and changes 

depending on the screen being displayed. 

AUDIO (page 82, 98, 99) 

Press to change the audio language or channel. 

(When the recorder is stopped, press to change the 

tuner audio.) 

SUBTITLE (page 98) 

Press to display/change the subtitles included in 

multilingual DVD-Video discs. 

While watching D.TV, press to change the D.TV 

subtitles. 

ANGLE (page 99) 

Press to switch camera angles on discs with multiangle 

scenes. 

MCACC 

Starts the Auto MCACC setup (page 24). 

18 TIMER REC (page 63, 86) 

Press to set a timer recording. 

19 / (page 95) 

Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press 

again to change the speed. 

/, / (page 96) 

While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion 

playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback 

speed. 

While paused, press to advance a single frame in 

either direction. 

When GUIDE Plus+® is displayed, use to display the 

previous/next day. 

20 REC MODE (page 83) 

Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture 

quality). 

21 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 114) 

Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing 

title to DVD or the HDD. 

22 Number buttons 

Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title 

selection; channel selection, and so on. 

/// (cursor buttons) and ENTER 

Use to control receiver functions. 

SETUP 

Use to access the menu system for surround sound 

setup, tuner settings and so on (page 24, 29, 30, 31, 36). 

SR+ 

Use to setup the SR+ features and to select the SR+ 

mode (page 35). 

F.S.SURR 

Use to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode 

(page 27). 

TEST TONE 

Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup) 

(page 32). 

19 

En

03 

20 

En 


SURROUND 

Use to select a Surround mode (page 26). 

ADVANCED 

Use to select a Pioneer original surround mode 

(page 27). 

SOUND (page 28) 

Press to access the sound menu, from which you can 

adjust bass and treble, etc. 

SLEEP 

Press to set the sleep timer (page 36). 

CLEAR 

Press to clear an entry and start again. 

23 PAUSE LIVE TV (page 84) 

Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with 

playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast. 

24 VIDEO IN (page 88) 

Press to change the HDD/DVD recorder input to use for 

recording. 

25 MENU (page 92) 

Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video, finalized 

DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or finalized DVD+R/+RW disc 

is loaded. 

When in the GUIDE Plus+® system, use to jump directly 

to the Menu bar. 

26 JUKEBOX (page 121) 

Press to display the Jukebox screen of the HDD/DVD 

recorder, from where you can copy music to the HDD for 

playback. 

27 TV CONTROL (page 148) 

After setting up, use these controls to control your TV. 

TEXT (page 82) 

Press to display Teletext information (in European 

countries except the UK) or to start the MHEG 

application display (UK only) if available during 

digital broadcasts. 

TV/DVD 

Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get 

the picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD 

mode’, in which you get picture and sound from the 

system’s tuner (or an external input). 

28 DISPLAY (page 99) 

Displays/changes the on-screen information 

displays. 

RDS DISP 

Changes RDS displays (page 30). 

29 MAIN/SUB 

Change from MAIN to SUB to access the green 

functions/commands on the remote. 

Using the remote control 

Please keep in mind the following when using the remote 

control: 

Make sure that there are no obstacles between the 

remote and the remote sensor on the unit. 

Remote operation may become unreliable if strong 

sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s 

remote sensor. 

Remote controllers for different devices can interfere 

with each other. Avoid using remotes for other 

equipment located close to this unit. 

Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the 

operating range of the remote. 

When the batteries run down or you change the 

batteries, the remote control mode is reset to 

Recorder 1. See Remote Control Mode on page 145. 

Use within the operating range in front of the remote 

control sensor on the display unit, as shown. 

30 30 

7 m


Putting the batteries in the remote 

control 

1 Open the battery compartment cover on the 

back of the remote control. 

2 Insert two AA/R6 batteries into the battery 

compartment following the indications (,) inside 

the compartment. 

3 Close the cover. 

Caution 

Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such 

as leakage and bursting. Please observe the 

following: 

Don’t mix new and old batteries together. 

Don’t use different kinds of battery together — 

although they may look similar, different batteries 

may have different voltages. 

Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each 

battery match the indications in the battery 

compartment. 

Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to 

be used for a month or more. 

When disposing of used batteries, please comply 

with governmental regulations or environmental 

public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or 

area. 

WARNING 

Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or 

other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or 

near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, 

overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the 

life or performance of batteries. 

21 

En

04 

22 

En 

Before you start 

Chapter 4 


Switching on 

The HDD/DVD recorder and receiver subwoofer have separate power switches. The power switch for the receiver 

subwoofer is located on the display unit. 

Remote Control 

RECORDER 

 

HDD/DVD FM/AM 


 

REC STOP REC HELP 

 

TOP MENU 

INFO 

DISC 

NAVIGATOR 

HOME MENU 

GUIDE 

CHANNEL 

CHANNEL 

A.TV / D.TV 

PREV NEXT 

 

The table below shows what needs to be switched on for 

various system functions: Setting up 

HDD/DVD 

OPEN/CLOSE 



USB 

Function Display unit 

RECEIVER 

 

SOUND 


ENTER 

CM BACK 

CM SKIP 

RETURN/EXIT 

VOLUME 

AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE OPEN OPEN 

OPEN MCACC 


 

SETUP / TUNE+ SR+ 

HDD/DVD 

recorder 

DVD playback On On 

CD playback On On 

HDD playback On On 

Radio On Off 

Timer recording Off On 


CH 

HDD/DVD Recorder (DVR-LX60D) 

STOP REC 

INPUT 

SELECT 

ONE TOUCH 

COPY 

A.TV/D.TV 

Display Unit 

VIDEO 

INPUT 2 S-VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO REC 

After connecting and installing the HDD/DVD recorder 

and receiver subwoofer, complete the steps below to set 

the system up for use. 

HDD/DVD recorder 

Set the date and time, TV channel tuning and the type 

of TV in the Setup Navigator (page 56). 


Switch off the display demo mode (page 24). 

Complete the Auto MCACC setup to optimize the 

surround sound (page 24).

Before you start 04 

Basic operation 

This manual is split into to parts, one covering using the 

receiver subwoofer, the other using the HDD/DVD 

recorder. Below are some common operations and 

where to find them explained in this manual. 

Watching a DVD 

Remember that when using the remote to control the 

HDD/DVD recorder, you should point the remote towards 

the display unit, not the recorder itself. 

RECORDER 

 

HDD/DVD 

FM/AM 


 

 

REC 

 


TOP MENU 

DISC 

NAVIGATOR 

HOME MENU 

GUIDE 

CHANNEL 

CHANNEL 

A.TV / D.TV 

PREV NEXT 

 

AUDIO 

SUBTITLE 

ENTER 

RECEIVER 

 

SOUND 


VOLUME 

MCACC 

1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer). 

2 Switch on the HDD/DVD recorder. 

3 Switch on your TV. 

Turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct 

video input. 

4 Press HDD/DVD to select DVD. 

5 Press OPEN/CLOSE on the HDD/DVD recorder 

to open the disc tray. 

6 Load a disc. 

Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc 

tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a doublesided 

DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play 

face-down). 

ANGLE 

CM BACK 

CM SKIP 

RETURN/EXIT 

/ / / 

TIMER REC REC MODE 

 


7 Press (play) to start playback. 

 

 

 


You can resume playback from the same 

point by pressing . (Press again to 

cancel the resume function.) 

Pauses playback, or restarts playback 

when paused. 

Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly 

to increase the scanning speed. 

See Basic playback on page 91 for more on playing discs. 

8 Adjust the volume. 

9 Adjust the sound using the surround effects. 

See Listening to your system on page 26 for details. 

Listening to a CD 



3 Press HDD/DVD to select DVD. 

4 Load a CD and start playback (page 93). 


6 Adjust the sound using the surround effects 

(page 26). 

Watching a title recorded on the HDD 




4 Press HDD/DVD to select HDD. 

5 Start playback of the HDD title (page 92). 



(page 26). 

Listening to the radio 


2 Tune to a station (page 29). 



(page 26). 

23 

En

05 

24 

En 

Getting started 

Chapter 5 


Important 

To access green functions on the remote, move the 

slider switch from MAIN to SUB. 

System demo setting 

Switches the automatic demo feature on or off (this 

starts when you plug in for the first time). 

AUDIO 

SUBTITLE 

ANGLE 

MCACC 


 

SETUP 

/ TUNE+ SR + ONE TOUCH COPY 

1 2 

3 

/ ST- ENTER 

4 5 6 



7 8 

9 


SOUND 

MENU 

SLEEP CLEAR JUKEBOX 

1 Switch the system into standby. 

2 Press SETUP. 

3 Use the / buttons to select DEMO from the 

menu, then press ENTER. 

4 Use the / buttons to select a setting, then 

press ENTER. 

Select from: 

DEMO ON – Switches the demo display on. 

DEMO OFF – Switches the demo display off and the 

system into standby. 

 

INPUT 

0 

CHANNEL 

VOLUME 

DISPLAY 

TEXT TV/DVD RDS DISP 

MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

Using the Auto MCACC setup for 

optimal surround sound 

The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration (MCACC) system 

measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening 

area, taking into account ambient noise, and testing for 

channel delay and channel level. After you have set up 

the microphone provided, the system uses the 

information from a series of test tones to optimize the 

speaker settings and equalization (Acoustic Calibration 

EQ) for your particular room. 1 

Important 

The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud; 

however, do not turn the volume down during setup 

as this may result in a sub-optimal setup. 

Make sure the microphone and speakers are not 

moved during the MCACC setup. 

RECORDER 

Note 

1 You only need to use the Auto MCACC setup once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or your room layout). 

 

HDD/DVD FM/AM 

RECEIVER 

 

SOUND 



 

REC 

 


TOP MENU 

AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE MCACC 


 


1 2 3 

/ ST- 

 




SOUND 

SLEEP CLEAR 

INPUT 

ENTER 

4 5 6 

7 8 

0 

CHANNEL 

9 

VOLUME 

TEXT TV/DVD 

MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 

RDS DISP

Getting started 05 

1 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP 

MIC jack on the rear panel. 

MCACC 



DVD/DVR1 

OUT SUBWOOFER 

SURROUND 



AUDIO INPUT 

DIGITAL 

SPEAKERS 


R L 




AC IN 


MCACC 

SETUP MIC 

ANTENNA 

2 Place the microphone at your normal listening 

position. 

Place it about ear height, and make sure it is level by 

using a table or chair. 

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers 

and the microphone. 

3 If the receiver subwoofer is off, press RECEIVER 

to turn the power on. 

4 Press MCACC. 

Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC. The 

volume increases automatically and the system outputs 

a series of test tones. 

To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished, 

press MCACC. The unit will continue to use the 

previous settings. 

If the ambient noise level is too high, NOISY blinks in 

the display for five seconds. To exit and check the 

noise levels 1 , press MCACC, or to try again, press 

ENTER when RETRY shows in the display. 

If you see an ERR MIC or ERR SP message in the 

display, there may be a problem with your mic or the 

speaker connections. To try again, press ENTER 

when you see RETRY 2 . 

When the MCACC setup is complete, the volume level 

returns to normal, COMPLETE 3 shows in the display, and 

Acoustic Calibration EQ is activated. 4 

L 

R 

Note 

1 If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup (too much ambient noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers 

from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be 

affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. 

Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV during Auto MCACC setup. 

2 If this doesn’t work, press MCACC, turn off the power, and check the problem indicated by the ERR message, then try the Auto MCACC setup 

again. 

3 If COMPLETE doesn’t appear, it is likely an error occurred during the setup. Please check all connections and try again. 

4 See Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 28 to switch on/off Acoustic Calibration EQ. 

25 

En

06 

26 

En 

Listening to your system 

Chapter 6 


Important 



Auto listening mode 

The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to 

any source as it was mastered: the output from the 

speakers mirrors the channels in the source material. 

If you set up the system for Front surround (page 6), the 

Front Surround modes will give the best results (see 

Using Front Stage Surround Advance on page 27). 

7 8 

SURROUND 

ADVANCED SOUND 

SLEEP CLEAR 

 

INPUT 

0 

CHANNEL 

VOLUME 

• Press SURROUND to select the AUTO listening 

mode. 

If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D 

or DTS indicator lights. 

You can also use the SURROUND button on the 

display unit to change the listening mode. 

Listening in surround sound 

You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in 

surround sound. Surround sound is generated from 

stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic 

decoding modes. 

If you set up the system for Front surround (page 6), the 

Front Surround modes will give the best results (see 

Using Front Stage Surround Advance on page 27). 

• Press SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening 

mode. 



9 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 


MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

7 8 

SURROUND 


SLEEP CLEAR 

 

INPUT 

0 

CHANNEL 

9 

VOLUME 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 


MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

The choices that appear in the display will vary according 

to the type of source that’s playing. 

If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D 

or DTS indicator lights. 

AUTO – Auto listening mode (see above) 

DOLBY PL (Dolby Pro Logic) – 4.1 channel surround 

sound for use with any two-channel source 

MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) – 5.1 channel 

surround sound, especially suited to movie sources, 

for use with any two-channel source 

MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) – 5.1 channel 

surround sound, especially suited to music sources, 

for use with any two-channel source; see Dolby Pro 

Logic II Music settings below 

STEREO – See Listening in stereo on page 27. 

Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings 

When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode (see 

above), there are three settings you can adjust: Center 

Width, Dimension, and Panorama. 

SETUP 

/ ST- ENTER 





1 2 

3 

4 5 6 

7 8 

0 

9 

SOUND 

SLEEP CLEAR 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

 

1 With Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode active, press 

SOUND. 

2 Use / to select C WIDTH, DIMEN. or 

PANORAMA then press ENTER. 

C WIDTH (Center Width) – Provides a better blend of 

the front speakers by spreading the center channel 

between the front right and left speakers, making it 

sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower 

settings). 

DIMEN. (Dimension) – Adjusts the depth of the 

surround sound balance from front to back, making 

the sound more distant (minus settings), or more 

forward (positive settings). 

PANORAMA – Extends the front stereo image to 

include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’ 

effect. 

3 Use / to adjust the setting then press ENTER 

to confirm. 

 

INPUT 

CHANNEL 

VOLUME 

TEXT TV/DVD 

MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 

RDS DISP

Listening to your system 06 

Using Front Stage Surround Advance 

The Front Stage Surround Advance modes are effective 

when you are using the Front surround speaker setup as 

described on page 6. 

/ ST 

 


F. S. SURR 

/ TUNE- TEST TONE VIDEO IN 


• Press F.S.SURR to select a Front Stage Surround 

Advance mode. 

Press repeatedly to select FOCUS5.1, WIDE5.1 or 

EXTRAPWR. 

FOCUS5.1 – Use to provide a rich surround sound 

effect directed to the center area where the left and 

right speakers’ sound projection converges. 

WIDE5.1 – Use to provide a surround sound effect to 

a wider area than FOCUS5.1 mode. 

EXTRAPWR – Outputs stereo sound (in the case of 

multi-channel sources, down-mixed stereo sound) 

from the surround speakers for powerful stereo 

effect. 

Using Advanced Surround 

The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any 

multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional 

surround sound effects. These modes are designed to 

provide optimum listening effect when using the 

Standard surround setup described on page 8. 

• Press ADVANCED to select an Advanced 

Surround mode. 

Press repeatedly to select: 

ACTION – Suitable for action movies 

UNPLUGED – Suitable for acoustic musical sources 

EXPANDED – Wide sound field 

SOUND 

SLEEP CLEAR 

INPUT 

ENTER 

4 5 6 

7 8 

0 

CHANNEL 

9 

VOLUME 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 


MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

7 8 

SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND 

SLEEP CLEAR 

 

INPUT 

0 

CHANNEL 

9 

VOLUME 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 


MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

TV SURR. – Surround sound for mono or stereo TV 

broadcasts 

SPORTS – Suitable for sports programming 

ADV.GAME – Suitable for TV game units 

VIRTUAL – A virtual surround effect using just the 

subwoofer and front speakers. 

X-STEREO – Powerful surround sound for stereo 

music sources 

Listening in stereo 

You can listen to any source — stereo or multichannel — 

in stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all 

channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers 

and the subwoofer. 


7 8 

SURROUND 


SLEEP CLEAR 

 

INPUT 

0 

CHANNEL 

VOLUME 

• Press SURROUND repeatedly until STEREO shows 

in the display. 



Using the Sound Retriever 

When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA 

compression process, sound quality often suffers from 

an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature 

employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality 

sound back to compressed 2-channel audio by restoring 

sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over 

after compression. 

Tip 

This feature is effective when used together with the 

Jukebox function of the HDD/DVD recorder. 

9 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 


MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

RECORDER 

 

RECEIVER 

 

SOUND 

HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER 


 

REC 

 


27 

En

06 

28 

En 


• While listening to a stereo source, press SOUND 

RETRIEVER. 

Press repeatedly to switch between: 

RTRV ON — Switches the Sound Retriever on. 

RTRV OFF — Switches the Sound Retriever off. 

Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ 

You can listen to sources using the Acoustic Calibration 

EQ set in Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal 

surround sound on page 24. 

1 Press SOUND. 

2 Use the / buttons to select MCACC EQ then 

press ENTER. 

3 Use the / buttons to switch EQ ON or EQ OFF 

then press ENTER to confirm. 

On the EQ OFF setting, equalization is set to off and 

speaker settings (channel delay and channel level) 

remains as it is set. 

Acoustic Calibration EQ is set to on automatically 

after Auto MCACC setup is used. 

Enhancing dialogue 

The Dialogue Enhancement feature is designed to make 

the dialogue stand out from other background sounds in 

a TV or movie sound track. 


SETUP 

 




SOUND 

SLEEP CLEAR 

INPUT 


1 2 

3 

/ ST- ENTER 

4 5 6 

7 8 

0 

CHANNEL 

VOLUME 

2 Use the / buttons to select DIALOGUE then 

press ENTER. 

3 Use the / buttons to select the amount 

dialogue enhancement then press ENTER to confirm. 

Select between OFF, MID or MAX. 

9 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 


MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

Using Quiet and Midnight listening 

modes 

The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or 

treble in a sound source. 

The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear 

effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels. 


2 Use the / buttons to select TONE then press 

ENTER. 

3 Use the / buttons to select QUIET or MIDNIGHT 

then press ENTER to confirm. 

To cancel the Quiet or Midnight listening modes, 

select BASS/TRE. 

Adjusting the bass and treble 

Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone. 


2 Use the / buttons to select TONE then press 

ENTER. 

3 Use the / buttons to select BASS/TRE then 

press ENTER. 

Selecting BASS/TRE cancels the Quiet and Midnight 

listening modes. These modes cannot be used at the 

same time. 

4 Use the / buttons to select BASS or TREBLE; 

use the / buttons to adjust the sound then press 

ENTER to confirm. 

Boosting the bass level 

There are two bass modes you can use to enhance the 

bass in a source. 


2 Use the / buttons to select BASSMODE then 

press ENTER. 

3 Use the / buttons to select the sound then 

press ENTER to confirm. 

Select between OFF, MUSIC or CINEMA.

Listening to the radio 07 

Chapter 7 


Important 




The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and 

lets you memorize your favorite stations so you don’t have 

to manually tune in every time you want to listen. 

RECORDER 

 

HDD/DVD FM/AM 

AUDIO IN 


 

REC STOP REC HELP 

 

TOP MENU 

INFO 

DISC 

NAVIGATOR 

HOME MENU 

GUIDE 

CHANNEL 

CHANNEL 

A.TV / D.TV 

PREV NEXT 

 

ENTER 

RECEIVER 

1 Press FM/AM to switch to the tuner, then press 

repeatedly to select the FM or AM band. 

The display shows the band and frequency. 

2 Tune to a frequency. 

There are three tuning modes — manual, auto, and highspeed: 

 

SOUND 

RETRIEVER 

VOLUME 

AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE MCACC 


 

SETUP 

/ TUNE+ 

SR + ONE TOUCH COPY 

1 2 

3 

4 5 6 

7 8 

0 

9 

SOUND 

SLEEP 

 

CLEAR 

/ ST- 

ENTER 


F. S. SURR / TUNE- 

TEST TONE VIDEO IN 


CM BACK 

CM SKIP 

RETURN/EXIT 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME DISPLAY 

TEXT TV / DVD RDS DISP 

MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

Manual tuning – Press TUNE +/– repeatedly to 

change the displayed frequency. 

Auto tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– until the 

frequency display starts to move, then release. The 

tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to 

keep searching. 

High-speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– until 

the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the 

button held down until you reach the frequency you 

want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the 

manual tuning method. 

Improving poor FM reception 

If you’re listening to an FM station in stereo but the 

reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by 

switching to mono. 

1 Tune to an FM radio station then press SETUP. 

2 Use the / buttons to choose FM MODE then 

press ENTER. 

3 Use the / buttons to select FM MONO then 

press ENTER. 

The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono 

reception mode. 

Select FM AUTO above to switch back to auto-stereo 

mode (the stereo indicator ( ) lights when receiving a 

stereo broadcast). 

Improving poor AM sound 

The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM 

radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched 

off. Also try changing the position and direction of the 

AM loop antenna. 

Changing the noise cut mode 

If you find that the sound quality is bad even after trying 

the above, you may be able to improve it using a different 

noise cut mode. Just choose the one that sounds best. 

1 Tune to an AM radio station then press SETUP. 

2 Use the / buttons to choose NOISECUT then 

press ENTER. 

3 Use the / buttons to select a Noise cut mode 

(1, 2 or 3) then press ENTER. 

29 

En

07 

30 

En 


Memorizing stations 

You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always 

have easy access to your favorite stations without having 

to tune in manually each time. 

1 Tune to an AM or FM radio station. 

Select mono or auto-stereo reception (FM) or the Noise 

Cut mode (AM) as necessary. These settings are saved 

along with the preset. 


3 Use the / buttons to choose ST.MEM. then 

press ENTER. 

4 Use the / buttons to select the station preset 

you want then press ENTER. 

Listening to station presets 

1 Make sure the tuner function is selected. 

2 Use the ST +/– buttons to select a station preset. 

Using RDS 

Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM 

radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of 

information — the name of the station and the kind of 

show they’re broadcasting, for example. 

One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of 

program. For example, you can search for a station that’s 

broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ. 

You can search the following program types: 1 

NEWS – News 

FINANCE – Stock market reports, 

AFFAIRS – Current Affairs commerce, trading, etc. 

INFO – General Information CHILDREN – Programs for 

SPORT – Sport 

children 

EDUCATE – Educational SOCIAL – Social affairs 

DRAMA – Radio plays, etc. RELIGION – Programs 

CULTURE – National or regional concerning religion 

culture, theater, etc. 

PHONE IN – Public expressing 

SCIENCE – Science and their views by phone 

technology 

TRAVEL – Holiday-type travel 

VARIED – Usually talk-based rather than traffic 

material, such as quiz shows or announcements 

interviews 

LEISURE – Leisure interests and 

POP M – Pop music 

hobbies 

ROCK M – Rock music JAZZ – Jazz 

EASY M – Easy listening COUNTRY – Country music 

LIGHT M – ‘Light’ classical music NATION M – Popular music in a 

CLASSICS – ‘Serious’ classical language other than English 

music 

OLDIES – Popular music from the 

OTHER M – Music not fitting ’50s and ’60s 

above categories 

FOLK M – Folk music 

WEATHER – Weather reports DOCUMENT – Documentary 

Displaying RDS information 

You can display the different types of RDS information 

available. 2 

• Press RDS DISP for RDS information. 

Each press changes the display as follows: 

Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station. 

For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone 

number as RT. 

Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio 

station. 

Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of 

program currently being broadcast. 

SEARCH – PTY search (see below) 

Current tuner frequency 

Searching for RDS programs 

You can search for a program type listed above. 

1 Press the FM/AM button for the FM band. 3 

2 Press RDS DISP repeatedly until SEARCH appears in 

the display. 

3 Use the / buttons to select the program type 

you want to hear. 

4 Press ENTER to start the search. 

The system searches the station presets for a match. If it 

finds one, searching stops for five sec. 

5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press 

ENTER within the five seconds. 

If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes. 

Note 

1 In addition, there are three other program types, TEST, ALARM, and NO TYPE. ALARM and TEST are used for emergency announcements. 

You can’t search for these, but the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS broadcast signal. NO TYPE appears when a program type cannot 

be found. 

2 If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly. 

If you see NO RADIO TEXT DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically 

switch to the PS data display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed). 

In the PTY display, NO DATA or NO TYPE may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds. 

3 RDS is only possible in the FM band. 

S U 

 

O OUC CO 




SOUND 

SLEEP CLEAR 

INPUT 

U 

1 2 3 

/ ST- ENTER 

4 5 6 

7 8 

0 

CHANNEL 

MAIN 

SUB 

S 

9 

VOLUME 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 


TV CONTROL

Surround sound settings 08 

Chapter 8 

Surround sound settings 

Important 



Using the Setup menu 

From the Setup menu you can access all the surround 

sound settings of the system 1 , including channel levels, 

speaker distances, dynamic range adjustment and dual 

mono audio playback. 

Use the following buttons to use the Setup menu. 

 

SETUP 

 




Channel level setting 

The Auto MCACC feature (see page 24) should give you 

the best surround sound setup. However you may find 

that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can 

improve the surround sound in your listening room. 

This method of setting the channel levels allows you to 

listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback 

channel. Note that the channel level settings for stereo 

playback are independent of the settings for surround 

sound playback. 

A further method of setting the channel levels is to use 

the test tone method. See Adjusting the channel levels 

using the test tone on page 32 for more on this. 

SOUND 

SLEEP CLEAR 

INPUT 

 


1 2 

3 

/ ST- ENTER 

4 5 6 

7 8 

0 

CHANNEL 

9 

VOLUME 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 


MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

1 Select stereo or multichannel playback for a source. 


3 Use the / buttons to select CH LEVEL, then 

press ENTER. 

4 Use / to select a channel; / to adjust the 

level of that channel. 

You can adjust the level of each channel by ±10 dB. 

If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, or a stereo 

source is playing in Auto mode, you will not be able 

to adjust the center or surround channels. 

5 Press ENTER when you’re finished. 

If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will 

overwrite the settings you have made here. 

Speaker distance setting 

The Auto MCACC feature (see page 24) should give you 

the best surround sound setup. However you may find 

that by further adjustment of the speaker distance 

settings you can improve the surround sound in your 

listening room. 

Set the distance of each speaker from your normal 

listening position. 


2 Use the / buttons to select DISTANCE, then 

press ENTER. 

3 Use / to select a speaker; / to adjust the 

distance. 

Adjust the following speakers: 

L – Front left speaker 

C – Center speaker 

R – Front right speaker 

SR – Surround right speaker 

SL – Surround left speaker 

SW – Subwoofer 

Each speaker can be adjusted from 0.3 m to 9.0 m. 

4 Press ENTER when you’re finished. 



Note 

1 There are other settings you can adjust from the Setup menu; these are explained in Listening to the radio on page 29 and Additional information 

on page 36. 

31 

En

08 

32 

En 

Surround sound settings 

Dynamic Range Control 1 

When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low 

volume, low level sounds — including some of the dialog 

— can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the 

Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by 

bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high 

level peaks. 

Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital 

soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks. 


2 Use the / buttons to select DRC, then press 

ENTER. 

3 Use / to select a setting. 

Select one of the following: 

DRC OFF (default) – No dynamic range adjustment 

(use when listening at higher volume) 

DRC MID – Mid setting 

DRC HIGH – Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds 

are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are 

increased) 

4 Press ENTER to exit. 

Dual mono setting 2 

Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital or DTS 

soundtracks should be played. You can also use this 

setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs 

recorded with bilingual audio. 


2 Use the / buttons to select DUALMONO, 

then press ENTER. 

3 Use / to select a setting. 

Select one of the following: 

CH1 MONO (default) – Only channel 1 is played 

CH2 MONO – Only channel 2 is played 

CH1/CH2 – Both channels are played through the 

front speakers 

4 Press ENTER to exit. 

Adjusting the channel levels using 

the test tone 

If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test 

tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see 

Channel level setting on page 31). A test tone is played 

through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the 

level as it plays. 

Note that the channel level settings for stereo sources 

are independent of the settings for surround sound 

sources. 

1 Press SURROUND to select the Auto listening 

mode. 

If you want to set the channel levels for stereo (two 

channel) playback, select the STEREO listening 

mode. 

2 Press TEST TONE. 

The test tone is output from each speaker in turn. 

3 While a test tone is playing, use the / buttons 

to adjust that channel level. 

The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test 

tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can 

adjust the level of each channel by ±10 dB. 

You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output 

using the VOLUME +/– buttons (this does not affect 

the channel level settings). 

If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, you will not 

be able to adjust the center or surround channels. 

Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer 

produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We 

suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening 

to a source. See the method described in Channel 

level setting on page 31. 

4 When you’re done, press ENTER to exit test tone 

setup. 



Note 

1 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the HDD/DVD recorder — see Audio DRC on 

page 141. 

2 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the HDD/DVD recorder — see Switching audio 

channels on page 99. 

 

SETUP 

/ ST- ENTER 

 


F. S. SURR / TUNE- TEST TONE 

VIDEO IN 

SURROUND 


SLEEP CLEAR 

INPUT 

CHANNEL 

MAIN 

SUB 

 


1 2 

3 

4 5 6 

7 8 9 

0 

VOLUME 

TEXT TV/DVD 

TV CONTROL 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 

RDS DISP

Other connections 9 

Chapter 9 

Other connections 

Important 

When connecting this system or changing 

connections, be sure to switch power off and 

disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. 

After completing all connections, connect the power 

cord to the wall socket. 

Connecting auxiliary components 

This system has optical-type digital inputs. Use these to 

connect external components, such as your MD or CD 

recorder. 

MCACC 



DVD/DVR1 

OUT SUBWOOFER 

SURROUND 



AUDIO INPUT 

DIGITAL 

SPEAKERS 


R L 




AC IN 

MD, CD Recorder, etc. 

VR1 

AL) DVD/DVR2 

AUDIO INPUT 

DIGITAL 

DIGITAL 



• Connect the DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) or DIGITAL 

(OPTICAL) jack on the rear panel to the optical 

output of an external playback component. 

These include digital components such as an MD player, 

digital satellite, or a game system. 

Connecting an analog audio component 

You can use the ANALOG input jacks to connect an 

analog audio component, such as a tape player. See 

Using this system for TV audio on page 14 for connection 

details (this explains connecting the audio output from 

your TV, but any analog audio component can be 

connected). 

ANTENNA 

L 

R 

To digital audio 

output (optical) 

Listening to an external audio source 

You can connect both analog and digital external audio 

sources to this system. Digital audio sources include 

digital satellite receivers, CD recorders, etc. Analog 

sources include your TV. See also Using this system for 

TV audio on page 14 and Connecting auxiliary 

components above. 

RECORDER 

 

HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN 

 

RECEIVER 

 

SOUND 

RETRIEVER 


 

1 If the system isn’t already on, press RECEIVER 

to switch on. 

Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite 

receiver, etc.) is switched on. 

2 Use the AUDIO IN button to select an audio input 

source. 

DVD/DVR1 

DVD/DVR2 

ANALOG DIGITAL 

3 If necessary, start playback of the external 

source. 

33 

En

9 

34 

En 

Other connections 

Connecting external antennas 

For an external AM antenna, use 5 to 6 meters of vinylinsulated 

wire and set up either indoors or outdoors. 

Leave the loop antenna connected. 

For an external FM antenna, use a PAL connector to hook 

up an external FM antenna. 

external FM antenna external AM antenna 

ANTENNA 

PAL connector 

FM UNBAL 75 

MCACC 



DVD/DVR1 

OUT SUBWOOFER 

SURROUND 



AUDIO INPUT 

DIGITAL 

SPEAKERS 


R L 


AM LOOP ANTENNA 



Indoor antenna 

(vinyl-coated Wire) 

(5 m to 6 m) 

AC IN 


ANTENNA 

Outdoor antenna 

Loop antenna 

L 

R 

Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma 

display 

If you have a Pioneer plasma display 1 , you can use an 

SR+ cable 2 to connect it to this unit and take advantage 

of various convenient features, such as controlling this 

unit via the plasma display’s remote sensor, automatic 

video input switching of the plasma display, display unit 

messages appearing on the plasma display screen, and 

automatic volume muting on the plasma display. 

MCACC 



DVD/DVR1 

OUT SUBWOOFER 

SURROUND 



AUDIO INPUT 

DIGITAL 

SPEAKERS 


R L 




Important 

With an SR+ cable connected, the remote must now 

be pointed towards your plasma display rather than 

the display unit of the receiver subwoofer in order to 

control the receiver subwoofer. 

• Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the 

CONTROL IN jack of this unit to the CONTROL OUT 

jack of your plasma display. 3 

Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need to 

make a few settings in the unit—see SR+ Setup for 

Pioneer plasma displays on page 35. 

Note 

1 This system is compatible with all Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward. 

2 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division 

for more information on obtaining an SR+ cable. 

3 You won’t be able to use the remote sensor of this unit with the CONTROL IN jack of this unit connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of your 

plasma display. You can use the remote sensor of the plasma display (even in standby) as long as the power isn’t switched off. 

AC IN 


Pioneer plasma display 

CONTROL IN 

L 

R 

CONTROL 

OUT

Other connections 9 

SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays 

Make the following settings if you have connected a 

Pioneer plasma display to this unit using an SR+ cable. 


 


1 2 3 

/ ST- ENTER 

4 5 6 

 



7 8 


1 Press SR+. 

2 Use the / buttons to choose SETUP, then 

press ENTER. 

3 Use the / buttons to choose the setting you 

want to adjust. 

The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle 

through the display. See below for a full list and 

description of each. 

4 Use the / buttons to adjust the setting. 

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to make other settings. 

6 When you’re done, press ENTER to leave the SR+ 

setup menu. 

Automatic plasma display volume muting 

When Volume Control is switched on, the volume of the 

plasma display is automatically muted when the receiver 

subwoofer is switched on, or the receiver subwoofer’s 

input function is changed to one that you would want to 

hear the sound from the receiver subwoofer rather than 

the plasma display (DVD, for example). 

VOL.C ON – When this unit is switched on, or the 

input function is changed, the volume on the plasma 

display is muted so only sound from this unit is 

heard. 

VOL.C OFF – This unit does not control the volume of 

the plasma display. 

SOUND 

SLEEP CLEAR 

INPUT 

0 

CHANNEL 

9 

VOLUME 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 


MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

Automatic plasma display input switching 

In order that the plasma display can switch automatically 

to the correct input when you switch the input function of 

the receiver subwoofer, you need to tell it how your 

system is connected. 

For example, if you connected your HDD/DVD recorder to 

the DV1 input on the receiver subwoofer, and to input 2 

on your plasma display, select the DV1 PDP2 setting here 

so that when you switch the input function of the receiver 

subwoofer to DV1 to watch your HDD/DVD recorder, the 

plasma display will automatically switch to input 2. 

For each receiver subwoofer input function (DV1 (DVD/ 

DVR1), DV2 (DVD/DVR2), DIG (DIGITAL), ANA 

(ANALOG)) you can select: 

NONE – does not switch the plasma display input 

PDP1 to PDP7 – switches the plasma display input to 

one of the numbered inputs. (Note that the number 

displayed may vary depending on the plasma display 

to which you connect this unit.) 

TVTN – switches the plasma display to its built-in 

TV tuner 

Note 

Note that certain PDP inputs (ex. PDP7) may be 

referred to on your plasma display as ‘PC Input’. 

The SR+ setting remains in effect even in standby. 

The SR+ setting does not affect the FM/AM tuner 

function. 

Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma 

display 

1 Press SR+ on the remote. 

2 Use / to select SR+ ON then press ENTER. 

The SR+ setting is maintained even after switching 

the receiver subwoofer into standby then back on. 

Automatic muting and input switching will be 

effective when the receiver subwoofer is switched on. 

If you disconnect the SR+ cable or switch the plasma 

display off while SR+ is on, the SR+ ON setting 

remains. 

To switch to SR+ OFF, follow steps 1 and 2, selecting 

SR+ OFF. 

Note 

You can control this unit with the plasma display’s 

remote sensor even in standby, but you can’t control 

this unit with either this unit’s remote sensor or the 

plasma display’s remote sensor when the plasma 

display is switched off (AC off) and the SR+ cable is 

connected to the CONTROL IN jack of this unit. 

35 

En

10 

36 

En 

Additional information 

Chapter 10 


Important 



Dimming the display 

You can choose to dim the display if you find it too bright. 1 


 

SETUP 

/ ST- ENTER 

 




2 Use the / buttons to select DIMMER then 

press ENTER. 

3 Use the / buttons to select LIGHT or DARK 


DTS CD setting 

If you play a DTS-encoded CD, you will need to change 

this setting to hear the decoded signal. 

1 Switch the system into standby. 


3 Use the / buttons to select CD TYPE from the 

menu, then press ENTER. 

4 Use the / buttons to select a setting, then 

press ENTER. 

Select from: 

NORMAL – Use for playback of regular audio CDs. 

Some DTS-encoded CDs will output noise when played. 

SOUND 

SLEEP CLEAR 

INPUT 

 


1 2 

3 

4 5 6 

7 8 

0 

CHANNEL 

9 

VOLUME 

MENU 

JUKEBOX 

DISPLAY 


MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

DTS-CD – Use for playback of DTS-encoded CDs, but 

note that the beginning of regular CD tracks may be 

skipped. 

Setting the sleep timer 


The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after 

a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying 

about it. 2 

1 Press the SLEEP button to select an option. 

Choose between the following options: 

SLP ON – Switches off after about an hour 

SLP OFF – Cancels the sleep timer 

After selecting SLP ON, you can press SLEEP again to 

check how much time is left. Each line indicates 

approximately 12 minutes (remaining): 

Resetting the system 

Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the 

factory default. 

1 Switch the system on. 

2 Press and hold SURROUND then press the 

STANDBY/ON button on the display unit. 

The next time you switch on, all the system settings 

should be reset. 

Note 

1 The display dims when the sleep timer is set, regardless of this setting. 

2 The display dims when the sleep timer is set. The HDD/DVD recorder does not automatically switch off with the sleep timer. 

 

SOUND 

MENU 

SLEEP 

CLEAR JUKEBOX 

INPUT 

0 

CHANNEL 

VOLUME 

DISPLAY 


MAIN 

TV CONTROL 

SUB 

SLP - - - - -

Additional information 10 

Installation and maintenance 

Hints on installation 

We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come, 

so please bear in mind the following points when 

choosing a location: 

Do... 

Use in a well-ventilated room. 

Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or 

stereo rack. 

Don’t... 

Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, 

including near radiators and other heat-generating 

appliances. 

Place on a window sill or other place where the system will 

be exposed to direct sunlight. 

Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. 

Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in 

your stereo system that becomes hot in use. 

Use near a television or monitor as you may experience 

interference — especially if the television uses an indoor 

antenna. 

Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be 

exposed to smoke or steam. 

Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth — this may 

prevent proper cooling of the system unit. 

Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough 

to support all four of the system unit’s feet. 

Troubleshooting 

Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with 

this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other 

components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks 

listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. 

If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from 

the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. 

If there is no sound or no multichannel sound from the DVR-LX60D HDD/DVD recorder, try setting the recorder’s 

audio-related settings back to their defaults — see The Initial Setup menu on page 137. 

General 

Problem Remedy 

The power does not turn on, or 

switches off suddenly (an error 

message may be displayed at 

startup). 

No sound is output when an 

input function is selected. 

No sound from surround or 

center speakers. 

Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on. 

Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the 

system to shut off automatically. 

Check that the speakers are connected correctly. 

Make sure there is enough space for ventilation around the receiver subwoofer. 

Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model. 

Try reducing the volume level. 

If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your 

dealer for servicing. 

If you’re playing from the HDD/DVD recorder, make sure that the digital coaxial cable is 

connected properly. Also make sure that the HDD/DVD recorder’s Digital Out and DTS Out 

settings are set to On, and that the MPEG Out setting is set to MPEG PCM. 

If you’re using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly (see 

Connecting auxiliary components on page 33). 

Turn up the volume. 

Refer to Channel level setting on page 31 to check the speaker levels. 

Check that you haven’t selected the AUTO, STEREO, or VIRTUAL mode (see Listening in 

surround sound on page 26). 

Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up on page 10). 

If you’re playing from the HDD/DVD recorder, check that the Dolby Digital Out setting is 

set to Dolby Digital. 

If the source is 96 kHz, this will be played in stereo. If you want to play it in surround 

sound, set the HDD/DVD recorder’s 96 kHz PCM Out setting to 96 kHz 48 kHz. 

37 

En

10 

38 

En 



Can’t operate using the remote 

control. 

Tuner 


Considerable noise in radio 

broadcasts. 

Auto tuning does not pick up 

some stations. 

Error Messages 

Replace the batteries (Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 21). 

Operate within 7 m, 30° of the remote sensor (Using the remote control on page 20). 

Remove any obstacles or operate from another position. 

Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light. 

For operating the HDD/DVD recorder, make sure that the control cable and coaxial cable 

are connected (page 10). 

If the receiver subwoofer is connected to a Pioneer plasma display with an SR+ cable, 

check that the plasma display is switched on. Point the remote control at the plasma 

display in order to operate the receiver subwoofer. 

Check that nothing is mistakenly plugged into the CONTROL IN jack. 

Connect the AM antenna (refer to Connecting up on page 10) and adjust the direction 

and position for best reception. You may also connect an additional internal or external AM 

antenna (refer to Connecting external antennas on page 34). 

Fully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. You 

may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 34). 

Turn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away. 

The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal. 

For more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna. 

Message Description 

2CH ONLY An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources, while the 

current source is a multichannel source. 

96K An operation is prohibited because the source is 96 kHz digital. 

EXIT Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity. 

NOISY Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully. 

ERR MIC An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is 

not connected properly. 

ERR SP An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers are not connected or are 

not connected properly. 

EEP ERROR Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. 

NO SPTYP Try switching the unit off then on again. If the error still appears, please contact a 

Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer.


Glossary 

Dolby Digital A multi-channel audio 

encoding system developed 

by Dolby Laboratories that 

enables far more audio to be 

stored on a disc than PCM 

encoding. 

Dolby 

Pro Logic II 

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. 

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are 

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered 

trademarks of DTS, Inc. 

Specifications 

A matrix decoding technology 

developed by Dolby 

Laboratories that expands any 

two-channel source audio, 

such as CDs and TV 

broadcasts, to a five-channel 

playback (left/center/right/left 

surround/right surround), 

resulting in a surround 

experience. 

DTS A multi-channel audio 

encoding system developed 

by DTS that enables far more 

audio to be stored on a disc 

than PCM encoding. 

SX-LX60D Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer 

• Amplifier section 

RMS Power Output: 

Front, Center, Surround. . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W per channel 

(1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 Ω) 

Subwoofer. . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 W (100 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 Ω) 

• FM tuner section 

Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz 

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω, unbalanced 

• AM tuner section 

Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz 

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Loop antenna 

• Subwoofer section 

Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Bass-reflex floor type 

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 1-way system 

Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm cone type 

Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω 

Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Hz to 1.0 kHz 

Maximum Input Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W 

• Miscellaneous 

Power requirements . . . . . . AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz 

Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 W 

Power consumption in standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 W 

Dimensions . . . . .200 mm (W) x 375 mm (H) x 428 mm (D) 

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0 kg 

• Accessories 

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) . . . . . . . . . 2 

Coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

Control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

Non-skid pads (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 

Spacers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 

Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

This operating instructions 

SSP-LX60D Speaker system 

(Front speakers x2, surround speakers x2, center speakers x2) 

• Front/surround speakers 

Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type 

(magnetically shielded) 

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system 

Speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm cone type 

Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω 

Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz to 20 kHz 

Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 W 

Dimensions . . 100 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) x 102.5 mm (D) 

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg 

• Center speakers 

Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type 

(magnetically shielded) 

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system 

Speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm cone type 

Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ω 

Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz to 20 kHz 

Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 W 

Dimensions . . 100 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) x 102.5 mm (D) 

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg 

• Accessories 

Speaker cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 

Non-skid pads (small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 

Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 

Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 

Spiral wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 

Note 

Specifications and design subject to possible 

modification without notice, due to improvements. 

39 

En

Section Two 


DVR-LX60D

Section Two 

Contents 

01 Before you start 

Symbols used in this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 

Disc/content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 43 

About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 

02 Connections 

Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 

Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 

Connecting a TV antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 

Easy connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 

Using the S-video or component video output . . . . . 50 

Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver . . . . . 51 

Connecting an external decoder box (1). . . . . . . . . . 52 

Connecting an external decoder box (2). . . . . . . . . . 52 

Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 

Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 

Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 

Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 

03 Getting started 

Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 

For users receiving digital broadcast services . . . . . 58 

Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system. . . . . . . . . . . 59 

04 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme 

guide 

The GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 

Using the GUIDE Plus+ system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 

Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 

GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 71 

05 Using the digital electronic programme guide 

The Digital EPG system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 

Using the Digital EPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 

Setting timer programmes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 

Other useful EPG functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 

06 Recording 

About DVD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 

About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 

Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 

Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 

Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners . . . . . . . . . . 81 

Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 83 

Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 

Pause Live TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 

About timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 

Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 

Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play). . 87 

Recording from an external component. . . . . . . . . . 88 

Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . 88 

Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 

DVD-RW Auto Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 

07 Playback 

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 

Basic playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 

Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents 

of a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 

Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 

Playing in slow motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 

Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 

The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 

Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 

Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . 98 

Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 

Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 

Displaying disc information on-screen. . . . . . . . . . . 99 

08 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder 

Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 

Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 

About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 

09 Editing 

Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 

The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 

10 Copying and backup 

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 

One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 

Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 

Using disc backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 

11 Using the Jukebox 

Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

Copying files via USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 

Editing Jukebox albums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 

12 The PhotoViewer 

Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 

Changing the display style of the PhotoViewer. . . . 126 

Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 

Reloading files from a disc or USB device . . . . . . . 127 

Importing files to the HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 

Selecting multiple files or folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 

Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 

Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . 129 

Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 

Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 

41 

En

42 

En 

Section Two 

13 The Disc Setup menu 

Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 

Initialize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 

Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 

Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 

Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 

14 The Video Adjust menu 

Setting the picture quality for TV and external 

inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 

Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . 135 

15 The Initial Setup menu 

Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 

Selecting other languages for language options. . . 147 

Using Software Update (Digital tuner) . . . . . . . . . . 147 

16 Additional information 

Setting up the remote to control your TV. . . . . . . . . 148 

TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 

Minimum copying times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 

Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 

If the picture freezes and the front panel and 

remote control buttons stop working . . . . . . . . . . . 155 

On-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 

Front-panel displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 

Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 

Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 

Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 

Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 

Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 

Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 

Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 

Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 

Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 

Specifications (DVR-LX60D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162


Chapter 1 


Symbols used in this manual 

The following icons are provided to help you quickly 

identify which instructions you need for which kind of 

disc. 

HDD 

DVD 

DVD-Video 

DVD (Video) 

DVD (VR) 

DVD+R 

DVD+RW 

DVD-RAM 

CD 

Video CD 

Super VCD 

WMA/MP3 

DivX 

A L L 

HDD 

Any type of DVD disc (recordable or 

playback only), finalized or not. 

Commercially produced DVD, finalized 

Video mode DVD-R/-RW. 

Video mode DVD-R/-RW (unfinalized) 

VR mode DVD-R/-RW 

DVD+R 

DVD+RW 

DVD-RAM 

Audio CD 

Video CD 

Super VCD 

WMA or MP3 files 

DivX files 

All of the above 

Disc/content format playback 

compatibility 

Compatible media 

• DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 / 2x to 4x / 2x 

to 6x 

• DVD-R ver. 2.0 /1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x, 

ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x 

• DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x 

• DVD+R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x 

• DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x, 

ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x 

• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 8x 

• DVD+R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x 

Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD 

writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt 

the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs 

between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we 

recommend using ver. 1.1 discs. 

The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders’ 

limited compatibility with DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs. 

Model Playable Recordable 

DVR-7000 *1,2,3 

Yes No 

DVR-3100/ 

DVR-5100H 

*1 Yes No 

*1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized 

VR mode and Video mode discs may not play. 

*2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when 

you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback. 

*3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play. 

Readable file system 

This recorder can play DVDs recorded under the 

following file systems 1 : ISO 9660*, UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, 

UDF 2.00, UDF 2.01. 

* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. Romeo and Joliet file 

systems are both compatible with this recorder. 

Note 

1• Depending on the recording technique used, even files recorded in compatible file systems may not play correctly. 

• MP3/WMA files can be played back when recorded onto a DVD that contains no video files and uses the UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.01 or 

ISO 9660 file systems. 

43 

En

01 

44 

En 


HDD/DVD Recording and playback compatibility 

This recorder can play and record all widely-used DVD disc types, and additionally provides HDD functionality. The 

table below shows some specific compatibility differences between the different disc types. 

Marks used in this manual 

Logos 

Notes to table 

*1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 132). 

*2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording (page 132). 

*3 Erasable, but free space does not increase. 

*4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist editing. 

*5 Must be compatible with DVD-R (VR) playback. 

*6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in some units) 

(page 88). 

*7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW (VR) playback. 

*8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback. 

*9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback. 

*10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off 

(page 143). 

*11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM. 

*12 CPRM-compatible discs only. 

*13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only Panasonic and 

Maxell discs have been tested to work reliably with this recorder. Discs 

from other makers may become unusable when recorded or edited. 

*14 Erasing a title does not increase the available recording time, nor 

increase the number of recordable titles left. 

*15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback. 

*16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized before it can be 

recorded (page 132). In this case, initialization will take about an hour. 

is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing 

Corporation. 

HDD DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R 

DVD 

+RW 

DVD- 

RAM 

HDD DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM 

*1 *1 *2 *13, 16 

Re-recordable/Erasable *3 *3 *3 

*14 

Editing of recorded programmes 

*4 

Recording of Copy-once protected 

material 

 

*12 

Playback in other players/recorders n/a *5 

*6 

Chase play 

 

*4 

 

*12 

*7 

*6 

 

*4 

 

*6, 15 

16:9 and 4:3 programme recording 

Bilingual broadcast recording of 

both audio channels 

 

*10, 11 

 

*11 

 

*11 

 

*4 

 

*8 

Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs 

DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD+R DL (Double-Layer) 

discs contain two recordable layers on a single side, 

giving about 1.8 times the recording capacity of a 

conventional single-layer disc. This recorder can record 

to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs. 

• If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video mode) or 

DVD+R DL discs recorded on this recorder on other 

DVD recorders/players, you must finalize them. (Note 

that some DVD recorders/players may not play even 

finalized DL discs.) 

• This logo indicates that the disc is a DVD-R DL or 

DVD+R DL disc: 

 

 

 

*12 

 

*9 

 

*11


Correct operation has been confirmed for DL discs: 

• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 4x 

Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim) 

• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 8x 


That’s 

JVC 

• DVD+R DL 2.4x 


RICOH 

• DVD+R DL 2.4x to 8x 


RICOH 

About DualDisc playback 

A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which 

contains DVD content –video, audio, etc. –while the other 

side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio 

material. 

The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with 

the CD Audio specification and therefore may not play. 

It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, 

the opposite side to that being played will be scratched. 

Scratched discs may not be playable. 

The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD 

-Audio content will not play. 

For more detailed information on the DualDisc 

specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or 

disc retailer. 

Other disc compatibility 

In addition to DVD, this recorder is compatible with a 

wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable 

discs will generally feature one of the logos on the disc 

and/or disc packaging shown below. Note however that 

some disc types, such as recordable CD (and DVD), may 

be in an unplayable format — see below for further 

compatibility information. 

Audio CD CD-R CD-RW 

Video CD 

Super Video CD (Super VCD) 

CD-R/-RW compatibility 

This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs. 

• Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD, 

ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or 

DivX files 

* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: 

Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file 

systems are both compatible with this recorder. 

• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and 

Video CD/Super VCD) 

• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only 

Compressed audio compatibility 

• Compatible media: DVD-ROM, DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/ 

+RW, DVD-RAM, CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, USB 

• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), 

Windows Media Audio (WMA) 

• Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz 

• Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended) 

• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes 

• VBR WMA playback: No 

• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec 

8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be 

playable but some parts of the specification are not 

supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR) 

• DRM (Digital Rights Management) 1 file playback: No 

• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for 

the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do 

not use for other file types) 

• File structure: Up to 99 folders/999 files (if these limits 

are exceeded, only files and folders up to these limits 

are playable) 

WMA (Windows Media Audio) 

compatibility 

This recorder can playback Windows Media Audio 

content. 

WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers 

to an audio compression technology developed by 

Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by 

using Windows Media Player for Windows XP, Windows 

Media Player 9 or Windows Media Player 10 series. 

Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. 

This product includes technology owned by Microsoft 

Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a 

license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc. 

Note 

1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of 

compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see 

the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software. 

45 

En

01 

46 

En 


DivX video compatibility 

DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the 

DivX ® video codec from DivX, Inc. This recorder can play 

DivX video files burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs. 

Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual 

DivX video files are called “Titles”. When naming files/ 

titles on a CD-R/-RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind 

that by default they will be played in alphabetical order. 

• Official DivX ® Certified product. 

• Plays all versions of DivX ® video (including DivX ® 6) 

with standard playback of DivX ® media files. 

• File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for 

the recorder to recognize DivX video files). Note that 

all files with the .avi extension are recognized as 

MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video 

files and therefore may not be playable on this recorder. 

• File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999 files. 

DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of 

DivX, Inc. and are used under license. 

DivX ® VOD content 

DivX 

In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on 

this recorder, you first need to register the recorder with 

your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by 

generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you 

submit to your provider. 

Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed 

number of times. When you load a disc containing this 

type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays 

is shown on-screen and you then have the option of 

playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining 

plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains 

expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has 

zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is 

displayed. 

If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of 

plays, then you may load the disc into your recorder and 

play the content as often as you like, and no message will 

be displayed. 

Important 

• DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM system. This 

restricts playback of content to specific, registered 

devices. 

• If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not 

authorized for this recorder, the message 

Authorization Error is displayed and the content 

will not play. 

• Resetting the recorder (as described in Resetting the 

recorder on page 161) will not cause you to lose your 

registration code. 

JPEG file compatibility 

• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* 

still image files 

*File format used by digital still cameras 

• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0 

• Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels 

• Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels 

• Progressive JPEG compatible: No 

• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif (must be used 

for the recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use 

for other file types) 

• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders/ 

999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that 

this on the disc then more can be reloaded) 

PC-created disc compatibility 

Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be 

playable in this recorder due to the setting of the 

application software used to create the disc. In these 

particular instances, check with the software publisher 

for more detailed information. 

Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are 

not compatible with this recorder. 

Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes 

for additional compatibility information. 

Dolby Digital 

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. 

“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby 

Laboratories.


DTS 

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of 

DTS, Inc. 

DVB 

The Digital Video Broadcasting Project, or DVB for short, 

is a set of open standards for digital broadcasting, 

covering terrestrial, cable and satellite broadcasts. 

Based around the MPEG-2 coding system, these open 

standards ensure that compliant systems are able to 

work together, independent of manufacturer. 

DVB is extremely flexible, being able to deliver virtually 

any kind of digital content to the home, including High 

Definition and Standard Definition TV, broadband 

multimedia content and interactive services. 

DVB is a registered trademark of the DVB Project. 

About the internal hard disk drive 

The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of 

equipment. When used without the proper care or in the 

wrong conditions, it is possible that recorded contents 

may be damaged or lost entirely, in some cases making 

even normal playback or recording impossible. Please 

understand that in the event of repair or replacement of 

the HDD or related components, all your HDD recordings 

will be lost. 

Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to 

protect against possible HDD failure. 

The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store 

recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up 

your important recordings onto DVD discs in order to 

protect against accidental loss. 

Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept 

responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any 

inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from 

HDD failure. 

• Do not move the recorder while it is on (this includes 

during EPG download when the display shows EPG). 

• Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface. 

• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan. 

• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid 

places, or in places that may be subject to sudden 

changes in temperature. Sudden changes in 

temperature can cause condensation to form inside 

the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure. 

• While the recorder is switched on (including during 

EPG download when the display shows EPG), do not 

unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity 

off from the breaker switch. 

• Do not move the recorder immediately after 

switching it off. If you need to move the recorder, 

please follow the steps below: 

1 After the message POWER OFF is shown on the 

front panel display, wait at least two minutes. 

2 Unplug from the wall socket. 

3 Move the recorder. 

• If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on 

there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be 

lost. 

• The HDD is very delicate. If used over time in an 

improper manner or in an unsuitable environment, it 

is possible that the HDD will fail. Signs of problems 

include playback unexpectedly freezing and 

noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture. 

However, sometimes there will be no warning signs 

of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of 

recorded material will be possible. In this case it will 

be necessary to replace the HDD unit. 

Optimizing HDD performance 

As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on 

the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the 

recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the 

recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD 

(which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see 

Optimize HDD on page 133). 

47 

En

02 

48 

En 

Connections 

Chapter 2 

Connections 

Rear panel connections 

1 2 

ANTENNA 

R 

IN 

AUDIO L VIDEO 

OUT 

Y PB PR 


S-VIDEO 

INPUT 3 


AV 1 (RGB) – TV 

G-LINK IN 

1 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT 

Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) 

jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT 

jack for connection to your TV. 

2 INPUT 3 

Stereo analog audio, video and S-video inputs for 

connection to a VCR or other source component. 

CONTROL 

3 AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector 

Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for 

connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART 

connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB. 

See AV2/L1 In on page 140 for how to set this up. 

4 HDMI OUT 

HDMI output for high quality digital audio and video. 

5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) 

Connect to the DVD/DVR1 coaxial jack on the receiver 

subwoofer. 

6 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 

A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or 

monitor with a component video input. 

7 OUTPUT 

Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for 

connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver. 

OUTPUT 

8 AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector 

Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for 

connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART 

connector. The video output is switchable between video, 

S-video and RGB. See AV1 Out on page 140 for how to set 

this up. 

9 G-LINK 

Use to connect the supplied G-LINK cable to enable 

GUIDE Plus+® to control an external satellite receiver, 

etc. 

3 4 5 


OUT 

IN 

5 V 30 mA 

HDMI OUT 

DIGITAL 

AUDIO OUT 

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

COAXIAL 

10 CONTROL IN 

Connect to the CONTROL OUT terminal of the receiver 

subwoofer. 

11 ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN/OUT 

Connect your DTV antenna to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) 

IN jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA 

(DIGITAL) OUT jack for connection to your TV. 

12 AC IN – Power inlet 

AC IN

Connections 02 

Front panel connections 

On the front panel there is a flip-down cover that hides 

more connections. 

Left side: 

13 DV IN 

A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a 

DV camcorder. 

14 USB port (Type B) 

USB port for connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer 

or PC. 

15 USB port (Type A) 

USB port for connecting a digital camera, keyboard or 

other USB device. 

Right side: 

DV IN 

16 INPUT 2 

Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and Svideo), 

especially suitable for camcorders, game 

consoles, portable audio, etc. 

Connecting a TV antenna 

This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners for 

terrestrial digital and terrestrial analog TV broadcasts. 

If you are ready to receive digital broadcasts now, use one 

of the supplied RF antenna cables connect an antenna 

(either an antenna wall outlet or indoor antenna) to the 

ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN connector. Next, connect the 

other supplied RF antenna cable to connect an antenna 

to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connector. Lastly, connect 

the recorder to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT 

connector. 

USB 

13 14 15 

INPUT 2 S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO 

16 

AUDIO VIDEO 

ANTENNA 

R 

L 

IN 

S-VIDEO 

INPUT 3 


OUT 

ANTENNA 

IN (RF IN) 

Y PB PR 


ANTENNA 

OUT 

OUTPUT 

To antenna input 



TV 

G-LINK IN 

CONTROL 


OUT 

IN 

5 V 30 mA 

ANTENNA 

(DIGITAL) IN 


or indoor antenna 

Important 

• If there is only one antenna outlet on your wall, use a 

divider. 

• Do not connect a component that can receive analog 

signals to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) OUT. 

If your area is not yet served with terrestrial digital 

services, connect your antenna’s output to the 

ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connector using one of the 

supplied RF antenna cables. Next, connect the recorder 

to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT connector. 

AUDIO VIDEO 

ANTENNA 

R 

L 

IN 

S-VIDEO 

INPUT 3 


OUT 

ANTENNA 

IN (RF IN) 

Y PB PR 


ANTENNA 

OUT 

OUTPUT 


Antenna 

wall outlet 


TV 

G-LINK IN 

CONTROL 


OUT 

IN 

5 V 30 mA 

We strongly recommend using an outdoor antenna for 

better broadcast picture quality. 

If, however, you want to use an indoor antenna, use one 

with a signal amplifier rated at 5 V, 30 mA and set Aerial 

Power to On in the Initial Setup menu (see page 138). 

DIGITAL 

AUDIO OUT 

HDMI OUT 

COAXIAL 

DIGITAL 

AUDIO OUT 

HDMI OUT 

COAXIAL 

AC IN 

AC IN 

49 

En

02 

50 

En 

Connections 

Easy connections 

The setup described below is a basic setup that allows 

you to watch and record TV programmes, and play discs. 

Other types of connections are explained starting on the 

following page. 

Important 

• These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). 

If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART 

connection, and you want to use the supplied audio/ 

video cable, see Basic connections on page 10. 

• The AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary 

(composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo 

analog audio. The AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) 

connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video 

input, as well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out 

and AV2/L1 In on page 140 for how to setup these 

options. 

• Before making or changing any rear panel 

connections, make sure that all components are 

switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet. 

From antenna output 

To recorder's 

antenna input 

AV2 (INPUT 1/ 

DECODER) 

AUDIO VIDEO 

ANTENNA 

R 

L 

IN 

S-VIDEO 

INPUT 3 


OUT 

Y PB PR 


AV1 (RGB) - TV 

OUTPUT 

TV 


VCR 


G-LINK IN 

CONTROL 


OUT 

IN 

5 V 30 mA 

DIGITAL 

AUDIO OUT 

HDMI OUT 

COAXIAL 

Antenna/cable TV 

wall outlet 

1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV. 

See Connecting a TV antenna on page 49 for details. 

• If you want to incorporate a VCR in your setup, connect 

it before the recorder (i.e., between the antenna wall 

outlet and the antenna input on the recorder). 

3 

1 

2 

From SCART AV 

connector 

To SCART AV 

connector 

AC IN 

2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the 

AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the 

SCART AV connector on your TV. 

3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2 

(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV 

connector on your VCR. 

Tip 

• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows 

you to record a TV programme from the built-in TV 

tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing 

on your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is 

in standby, Power Save must be set to Off — see 

Power Save on page 137). 

Using the S-video or component 

video output 

If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your 

TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output 

jacks, as well as an S-video and component video output. 

To component video input 

AUDIO 

OUTPUT 

COMPONENT 

VIDEO OUT 

TV 

AUDIO VIDEO 

ANTENNA 

R 

L 

IN 

S-VIDEO 

INPUT 3 


OUT 

To audio input 

2 

Y PB PR 


S-VIDEO 

OUTPUT 

OUTPUT 


G-LINK IN 

CONTROL 


OUT 

IN 

5 V 30 mA 

1 Connect the S-video or component video output 

to a similar input on your TV. 

For an S-video connection, use an S-video cable (not 

supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUTPUT jack to an Svideo 

input on your TV. 

For a component video connection, use a component 

video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT 

VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV. 

See also Component Video Out on page 139 for how to set 

up the component video output for use with a progressive 

scan-compatible TV. 

1 

DIGITAL 

AUDIO OUT 

HDMI OUT 

COAXIAL 

To video input 

AC IN


2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the 

corresponding audio inputs on your TV. 

You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the 

yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up 

the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs 

for correct stereo sound. 

Connecting to a cable box or satellite 

receiver 

If you have a cable box or satellite receiver with a built-in 

decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown 

on this page. 1 If you are using a separate decoder box for 

your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions 

on the next page. 

Using the setup on this page you can: 

• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box, 

satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver. 

• Change channels and set timer recordings on the 

external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+® system 

(via the G-LINK cable, and after setting up). 

Important 

• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’ 

your VCR, satellite receiver or other component. 

Always connect each component directly to your TV 

or AV amplifier/receiver. 

• When using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make a 

timer recording from an external receiver, make sure 

that the external receiver is switched on. 

From antenna output 

To recorder's 

antenna input 

AUDIO VIDEO 

ANTENNA 

R 

L 

IN 

S-VIDEO 

INPUT 3 


1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. 

See Connecting a TV antenna on page 49 for more on RF 

antenna connections, including from this recorder to 

your TV. 


AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector 

on your TV. 

This enables you to watch discs. 



connector on your cable box/satellite receiver. 

This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. 

4 Plug the supplied G-LINK cable to the G-LINK 

jack. 

This enables you to control the tuner in the external 

receiver using the GUIDE Plus+® system. 

Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK cable so 

that the IR receiver on your cable/satellite receiver will 

pick up the control signals (see diagram). 

Note 

1 The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video connections. 

OUT 

Y PB PR 


G-LINK cable 

OUTPUT 

TV 


Cable/Satellite 

receiver 


G-LINK IN 

3 

AV2 (INPUT 1/ 

DECODER) 

CONTROL 


OUT 

IN 

5 V 30 mA 


DIGITAL 

AUDIO OUT 

HDMI OUT 

COAXIAL 

2 

1 

From SCART AV 

connector 

O 

S-VIDEO 

INPUT 3 

4 

To SCART AV 

connector 

OUTPUT 

Satellite dish/ 

antenna/cable TV 

wall outlet 



G-LINK IN 

AC IN 

CONTROL 

51 

En

02 

52 

En 

Connections 

See the manual that came with your cable/satellite 

receiver if you’re not sure where the IR receiver is on the 

front panel. Alternatively, experiment with the remote 

control, operating it from very close range until you find 

the place where the receiver responds. 

Tip 

• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows 

you to record a TV programme from the built-in TV 

tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing 

on your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is 

in standby, Power Save must be set to Off — see 

Power Save on page 137). 

Connecting an external decoder box (1) 

If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your 

satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on 

this page. See above for how to connect the G-LINK 

cable. 

Important 

• Do not connect your decoder box directly to this 

recorder. 

• Information from the decoder (for example, relating 

to pay TV services), is only viewable when this 

recorder is off (in standby). 

• For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, 

the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be 

switched on during recording. 

• It is not possible to watch one TV programme and 

record another using this setup. 

Antenna/cable TV 

wall outlet 

From SCART AV 

connector 

VCR/Satellite receiver 

/Cable box 

3 

AUDIO VIDEO 

ANTENNA 

R 

L 

DIGITAL 

IN 

AUDIO OUT 

S-VIDEO 

INPUT 3 


HDMI OUT 

COAXIAL 


G-LINK IN 

OUT 

IN 

OUTPUT 

OUT 

Y PB PR 

CONTROL 

5 V 30 mA 



1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV 

outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite 

receiver/cable box. 

2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your 

decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box. 

See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed 

instructions. 

3 Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite 

receiver/cable box to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) 

AV connector on this recorder. 

4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1 (RGB)-TV 

AV connector to your TV. 

Connecting an external decoder box (2) 

If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and 

your TV as shown on this page. 1 

Using the setup on this page you can: 

• Record scrambled channels received using the 

recorder’s built-in analog TV tuner. 

Note 

1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu: 

• Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 140). 

• From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 139). 

1 


TV 

SCART AV 

connection 

2 

Decoder 

AV2 (INPUT 1/ 

DECODER) 


4 

To SCART AV 

connector 

AC IN


Important 

• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, 

satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each 

component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/ 

receiver. 

AUDIO VIDEO 

ANTENNA 

R 

L 

IN 

S-VIDEO 

INPUT 3 


OUT 

Y PB PR 


OUTPUT 

TV 

Decoder 


G-LINK IN 

1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV. 

See Connecting a TV antenna on page 49 for details. 


AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV 

connector on your TV. 

This enables you to watch discs. 



connector on your decoder box. 

This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. 

Connecting using HDMI 

CONTROL 


OUT 

IN 

5 V 30 mA 

DIGITAL 

AUDIO OUT 

HDMI OUT 

COAXIAL 

If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped 1 monitor or 

display 2 , you can connect it to this recorder using an 

HDMI cable (not supplied). 

The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital 

video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio. 

3 

AV2 (INPUT 1/ 

DECODER) 


From SCART AV 

connector 

2 

To SCART AV 

connector 

AC IN 

1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT 

connector on this recorder to an HDMI connector on 

an HDMI-compatible display. 

AUDIO VIDEO 

ANTENNA 

R 

L 

IN 

S-VIDEO 

INPUT 3 


• The arrow on the cable connector body should be 

face down for correct alignment with the connector 

on the recorder. 

When connected to an HDMI component or HDCPcompatible 

DVI component, the HDMI indicator lights. 

HDMI setup is generally automatic. There are however 

settings you can change if you need to. See HDMI Output 

(only available when an HDMI device is connected) on 

page 144 for more information. Note that the HDMI 

settings remain in effect until you change them, or 

connect a new HDMI component. 

Important 

• An HDMI connection can only be made with DVIequipped 

components compatible with both DVI and 

High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). 

If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will 

need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDCP 

connection, however, does not support audio. 

Consult your local audio dealer for more information. 

• The HDMI connection is compatible with 32 kHz, 

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit 2-channel 

linear PCM signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and 

MPEG audio bitstream. 

• If your connected component is only compatible with 

Linear PCM, the signal is output as Linear PCM (DTS 

audio is not output). 

Note 

1 Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. 

2 The pixel resolution of this recorder’s HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and PAL 

(720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p). If your display is not compatible with these resolutions the picture may not be correctly reproduced. 

OUT 

Y PB PR 


HDMI To HDMI 

IN input 

OUTPUT 


HDMI-compatible display 

G-LINK IN 

CONTROL 

HDMI 

OUT 


OUT 

IN 

5 V 30 mA 

DIGITAL 

AUDIO OUT 

HDMI OUT 

COAXIAL 

AC IN 

53 

En

02 

54 

En 

Connections 

• If you have connected to a Pioneer plasma display, 

please select the HDMI setup on the display (refer to 

the supplied manual for more on this). 

About HDMI 

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) supports 

both video and audio on a single digital connection for 

use with DVD players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes, 

and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide 

the technologies of High-bandwidth Digital Content 

Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface 

(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital 

content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant 

displays. 

HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, 

or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel 

surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncompressed 

digital video, a bandwidth of up to five gigabits 

per second (Dual Link), one connector (instead of several 

cables and connectors), and communication between 

the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. 

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia 

Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI 

licensing LLC. 

Connecting other AV sources 

Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder 

A.TV D.TV PLTV 


USB 

HDD/DVD 

DivX COPY HDMI 

AUDIO/VIDEO 

OUTPUT 

(Rear panel) 

VCR 


Analog camcorder 

1 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your 

VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this 

recorder. 

This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR 

or camcorder. 

CH 

OPEN/CLOSE 

ONE TOUCH 

STOP REC 

COPY 

INPUT 

A.TV/D.TV 

SELECT 

AUDIO/VIDEO 

INPUT 

(Front panel) 


1 2 

To audio/video input 

From audio/video output 

• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the 

video connection. 

• Alternatively, you can use the AV2 (INPUT 1/ 

DECODER) SCART connector for audio/video input 

and output with just one SCART cable. 

2 Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your 

VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder. 

This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or 

camcorder. 

• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the 

video connection. 

• The front panel connections make convenient 

connections for a camcorder input. 

• When connecting an external AV source that only 

supports monaural sound, only insert the left (white) 

audio jack to this device. Doing so will allow the same 

sound track to be recorded to both channels. You 

must connect to the INPUT 2 jack on the front panel. 

Connecting a DV camcorder 

You can connect a DV camcorder or DVD recorder with 

DV output to the front panel DV IN jack. 

Important 

• This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is 

not compatible with digital satellite receivers or D- 

VHS video decks. 

A.TV D.TV PLTV 


USB 

HDD/DVD 

DivX COPY HDMI 

DV 

IN 


From DV output 

DV camcorder 

• Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV 

jack of your DV camcorder to the front panel DV 

IN jack of this recorder. 

CH 

OPEN/CLOSE 

ONE TOUCH 

STOP REC 

COPY 

INPUT 

A.TV/D.TV 

SELECT 

INPUT 2 S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO REC


Connecting a USB device 

Using the USB ports on the front of the recorder you can 

connect USB devices such as digital cameras, printers, 

keyboards and PCs. Please also see the instructions that 

came with the device you want to connect before using. 

PictBridge-compatible 

Printer 

PC 

USB 

HDD/DVD 

OPEN/CLOSE 




USB 


ONE TOUCH 

STOP REC 

COPY 

INPUT 

CH 

A.TV/D.TV 

SELECT 

USB 

(Type B) 

USB 

(Type A) 

Digital Camera 

Important 

• Some USB devices may not work with this recorder. 

• When connecting a PC to this unit, make sure the 

power is turned off on both the PC and this unit when 

you connect them via USB. 

• We recommend connecting USB devices when this 

recorder is switched off (in standby). 

JPEG file storage devices 

• Digital still camera 

• Memory card reader (any type of memory card) 

• USB memory 

The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FATcompatible. 

Note that if the device is partitioned, this 

recorder may not recognize it. 

The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be used to 

transfer up to a maximum of 4000 files. 

WMA/MP3 file storage devices 

• Memory card reader (any type of memory card) 

• USB memory 

• PC (Use Connect PC function) 

The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FATcompatible. 

Note that if the device is partitioned, this 

recorder may not recognize it. 

Note that although multi-slot card readers can be used, 

the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted. To 

read another card, remove all the cards and insert the 

card to be read again. 

USB 

Keyboard 

Using a USB hub 

• Use a hub compatible with USB 1.1 and/or 2.0. 

• Use an independently powered hub (bus powered 

hubs may not work reliably). 

• In the event of unreliable operation with the hub, we 

recommend plugging the device directly into the 

recorder’s USB port. 

• Operation may become unreliable if too many 

devices are connected to the hub. In this case, try 

unplugging some devices. 

• If the power delivered through a hub is insufficient for 

the devices connected, communication can become 

unreliable. In this case, disconnect one or more 

devices then perform a USB restart. (See Restart USB 

Device on page 145.) 

Using a USB printer 

• Use a PictBridge-compatible printer. 

Using a USB keyboard 

• Do not use a PS/2 keyboard connected using a PS/2- 

USB adapter. 

Using a PC 

• Note that you can connect a PC to this device via USB 

to copy WMA and MP3 files. For more information, 

see Connect PC on page 121. To use Connect PC with 

this device, your PC must run either the Windows XP 

Home Edition (SP2) or Windows XP Professional 

(SP2) operating system and be able to run Windows 

Media Player 10. Even if your PC can run Windows 

Media Player 10, we cannot guarantee that it will 

function properly with this device. For more details 

see the ‘Help’ section of Windows Media Player 10. 

Plugging in 

After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder. 

• Use the supplied power cable to connect this 

recorder to a power outlet. 

55 

En

03 

56 

En 


Chapter 3 


Switching on and setting up 

When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you 

can make several basic settings using the Setup 

Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the 

clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output. 

If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly 

recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting 

to use the recorder. 

1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this 

recorder. 

RECORDER 

2 Switch on the recorder. 

When you switch on for the first time, your TV should 

display the Setup Navigator screen (If the Setup 

Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the 

Initial Setup menu; see page 137). 

• If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using 

a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will 

take a few seconds to download country, TV screen 

size and language information. (Check the manual 

that came with your TV for compatibility information.) 

ENTER 

3 Choose a language (then press ENTER). 

Initial Setup 

Basic 

Tuner 

Video In/Out 

Audio In 

Audio Out 

Language 

Recording 

Playback 

Clock Setting Language 

Input Line System 

Power Save 

HELPp 

Setup N avigator 

ENTER 4 Start the Setup Navigator. 

k Setting 

t Line 

Complete 

System 

this setup before you 

start using your recorder. 

er Save 

P Start 

p Navigator Cancel 

Please use the Initial Setup if you 

want to make more detailed settings. 

• If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press 

to select Cancel, then press ENTER to exit the Setup 

Navigator. 

5 Select an Aerial Power setting 1 for the 

built-in digital tuner. 

• On: power is always supplied to the connected aerial, 

whether the recorder is on or in standby. 

• Auto: power is only supplied when this recorder is on. 

• Off: power is never supplied to the aerial. 

6 Select ‘Auto Scan’ to start scanning for 

D.TV channels. 

• Select Do not set if you want to skip D.TV channel 

setup (because they have already been set up, for 

example), then skip to step 8 below. 

7 Select your country. 

The recorder starts scanning for new channels. After the 

scan is complete the recorder will let you know how many 

new channels were found. 

• The country setting will apply to both the digital and 

analog TV tuners. 

• The clock will also be set automatically here if D.TV 

channels are found. 

• If no new channels were found a message appears 

asking if you want to scan again. Check the aerial 

connection before selecting Yes. (If you select No, 

skip to step 8 below.) 

Note 

1 If the recorder does not accept the On or Auto setting (the highlight jumps back to Off), check that the antenna is properly connected and 

that it is not shorted, then try making the setting again. 

ENTER 

ENTER 

ENTER


ENTER 

8 Select the analog TV (A.TV) Auto 

Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or ‘Download from 

TV’), or ‘Do not set’. 

k Setting Auto Channel Setting 

Line System 

er Save Auto English Scan 

P Download from TV 

p Navigator Do not Set 

• Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup 

(because they have already been set up, for example). 

• You can only use the Download from TV feature if 

this recorder is connected to your TV using a fullywired 

21-pin SCART cable via the AV1 (RGB)-TV 

connector, and if your TV supports this function 

(check your TV’s instruction manual for more details). 

ENTER 

• Select your country. 

k Setting Country Selection 

t Line System 

er Save Country UK 

P 

• Auto-tuning channels 

The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the 

channel presets. 

Tuning 

Cancel 

32/99 

• Downloading channels from your TV 

Use the Download from TV option to download all the 

channels that your TV is tuned to. 

ENTER 

Downloading Pr 5 

Cancel 

32/99 

9 Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, 

or ‘Manual’ to set the clock manually. 

If the clock was already set from a D.TV channel in step 6, 

this step is skipped. 

k Setting Clock Setting 

Line System 

er Save Auto 

P Manual 

• Auto clock setting 

Some TV channels broadcast time signals together 

with the programme. This recorder can use these 

signals to set the clock automatically. 

Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number 

that broadcasts a time signal, then move the 

cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER. 

k Setting Auto Clock Setting 

Line System 

Date 

er Save 

–– / –– / –––– 

P Time 

–– : –– 

p Navigator 

Clock Set CH 

Pr 1 

Start 

The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After 

you see that it’s set, select Next to proceed. 

k Setting Auto Clock Setting 

Line System 

Date 

er Save 

MON 01 / 01 / 2007 

P Time 

11 : 20 

p Navigator 

Clock Set CH 

Pr 1 

Start 

Next 

If the time could not be set automatically, press 

RETURN/EXIT to go back to the previous screen and 

select Manual. 

• Manual clock setting 

If no stations in your area are broadcasting time 

signals, you can set the clock manually. 

Use the / buttons to set your time zone. 

You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative 

to GMT. 

k Setting Manual Clock Setting 

Line System 

er Save Time Zone 

P 

p Navigator Summer Time Off 

England 

London 

Press then use the / buttons to select ‘On’ 

or ‘Off’ for summer time, then press ENTER. 

Select On if you are currently using summer time. 


Line System 

er Save Time Zone 

P 

p Navigator Summer Time On 

England 

London 

1/2 

1/2 

57 

En

03 

58 

En 


Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then 

press ENTER to make all the settings. 


Line Date System 

er Save 

MON 01 / 01 / 2007 

P Time 

00 : 00 

p Navigator 

Time Zone 

England 

London 

Summer Time On 

• Use the / buttons to change the value in the 

highlighted field. 

• Use the / buttons to move from one field to 

another. 

• You can go back to the previous screen in the Setup 

Navigator by pressing RETURN/EXIT. 

ENTER 

10 Select the EPG (Electronic Programme 

Guide) type to use. 

• GUIDE Plus+: Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG 

(see also Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on 

page 59 and Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic 

programme guide on page 62). 

• Digital EPG: Use the SI EPG (programme information 

broadcast together with digital channels). 

• If no channels were found when scanning for digital 

TV channels then this screen does not appear and 

the EPG is set according to the country set in step 7 

above. 

ENTER 

11 Select the TV screen type, ‘Wide (16:9)’ 

or ‘Standard (4:3)’. 

ENTER 

k Setting TV Screen Size 

Line System 

er Save 

P 

p Navigator 

Wide (16:9) 

Standard (4:3) 

12 Select whether or not your TV is 

compatible with progressive scan video. 

k Setting Progressive 

Line System 

er Save Compatible 

P Not Compatible 

p Navigator Don't Know 

• This screen is not displayed when an HDMI signal is 

being output. 

2/2 

ENTER 13 Press to continue after reading the HDD 

caution. 

ENTER 

k Setting In the event of HDD failure, recordings may 

be lost or normal playback/recording may 

Line 

not 

System 

be possible. 

er Save 

As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD 

P failure, we recommend to use the HDD only 

p Navigator as temporary storage media. 

Please copy recordings you want to keep 

to recordable DVD. 

Press ENTER to continue. 

14 Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit the Setup 

Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you want to start again. 

k Setting 

Line System Setup is complete! 

er Save 

Finish Setup 

p Navigator Go Back 

That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator. 

• If there are blank channels with no station, you can 

set these to skip using the manual channel setting. 

See Manual CH Setting on page 139. 

For users receiving digital broadcast 

services 

This unit can set its internal clock automatically from 

digital broadcasts. However, depending on the 

broadcaster, the clock information received may not be 

accurate. 

Use the following procedure (while the recorder is not 

recording) to set the clock manually. 

1 HOME MENU Press HOME MENU. 

ENTER 

2 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Basic’ > ‘Clock 

Setting’. 

3 Highlight the time setting. 

ENTER 

4 Press to display the manual clock setting 

screen. 

5 Set the correct time. 

Return to automatic clock setting 

• To return to the automatic clock setting, follow the 

instructions for ‘Replace Channels’ (page 137).


Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system 

This section is only applicable if you chose to use the 

GUIDE Plus+ system as the EPG type in step 10 of the 

Setup Navigator above. 

The GUIDE Plus+® system is a free, interactive onscreen 

television programming guide. The system offers 

programme listings for all major channels, one-touch 

recording, search by genre, recommendations according 

to your profile and more. 

For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function correctly, it is 

important that you set the language and country 

correctly in the Setup Navigator, and that you have 

performed a scan for available channels, as these are all 

used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of these things 

are not yet set, please run the Setup Navigator first (see 

Switching on and setting up on page 56). 

TV listings information is received via ‘host channels’. In 

order to receive the correct TV listings information for 

your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE 

Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information. 

The initial download can take up to 24 hours, but once 

this is done, all future updates are automatic. 

GUIDE 

1 Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu. 

The language and country settings are already set to 

whatever you selected in the Setup Navigator. 

ENTER 

2 Highlight ‘Postal Code’. 

SETUP /TUNE+ 

1 2 

SR+ 

3 

/ST– /ST+ 

4 

ENTER 

5 6 

F.S.SURR /TUNE– TEST TONE 

7 8 9 

ENTER 

ADVANCED 

3 0 

Enter your postal code. 

The system uses your postal code to identify which TV 

listings data is correct for the area in which you live, so it 

is important that you enter it correctly. 

59 

En

03 

60 

En 


4 If you are using an external receiver (such as a 

satellite receiver) with the supplied G-LINK cable, 

complete this step, otherwise jump to step 5 below. 

• See Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver on 

page 51 for more on using the supplied G-LINK cable. 

• Select External Receiver 1, 2 or 3, then press 

ENTER. (If you have just one external receiver, use 

External Receiver 1. You can add further receivers in 

2 and 3 if you need to.) 

After pressing ENTER: 

• Select your reception method (Terrestrial, Cable or 

Satellite). 

• Select your provider (if applicable). 

• Select the brand of your external receiver. 

• Identify which input your external receiver is 

connected to. 

After completing these steps the recorder will try and 

communicate with your external receiver and change the 

channel via the G-LINK cable. If the channel was 

successfully changed, select Yes to confirm. 

If the channel did not change, select No. The GUIDE 

Plus+ system will try other codes assigned to your 

external receiver. If none of the codes changes the 

channel successfully, tune your external receiver to the 

host channel for your country (refer to step 5 below) and 

leave it on overnight. The recorder needs to be in standby; 

it will wake up automatically and download new codes 

from the host channel. The next day, try this setup 

process again: 

• Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ screen. 

• Press to highlight the Menu bar, then use to 

reach the Setup area and select Setup. 

• Continue setting up from the start of this step again. 

If your external receiver still doesn’t respond to the G- 

LINK controller, please call customer support and report 

the brand and model of your external receiver. 

See also GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting on 

page 71. 

5 Identify the host channel for your country. 

The TV listings information available in the GUIDE Plus+ 

system is distributed throughout Europe by selected 

broadcasters called host channels. It is important that 

the host (analog) channel for your country is correctly 

identified in order to receive listings information (EPG 

download). 

Follow A, B or C below depending on your setup: 

A If you are not using an external receiver, this 

recorder will automatically scan all channels for the 

host channel: 

• Leave the recorder in standby overnight (do not leave 

it switched on). 

B If you are using an external receiver, you need to 

identify the host channel from the table below: 

Country/ 

Region 

Host channels Comments 

Austria Eurosport 

Belgium RTL-TVI 

France Canal+ Analog only 

Germany Eurosport 

Italy MTV Analog only 

Netherlands Eurosport 

Spain Tele 5 Analog only 

Switzerland Eurosport 

UK ITV, Eurosport ITV is analog only. Use Eurosport 

if you are a SKY subscriber and 

you no longer have an analog 

terrestrial antenna. 

• Tune your external receiver to the appropriate host 

channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in 

standby overnight. 

C If you use both an external receiver and this 

recorder as sources, follow the instructions above for 

setting up without an external receiver. Only if this is 

unsuccessful try the external receiver method. 

About EPG download 

• EPG data can only be received when the recorder is 

in standby. (When not using the recorder, therefore, 

please switch it into standby.) If you’re using an 

external receiver, leave this on when EPG data is 

downloading. 

• If you cannot receive any of the host channels (see 

the above table) then you won’t be able to use the 

GUIDE Plus+ system. In this case do not set the 

postal code (or set Country to Other) in the GUIDE 

Plus+ setup screen. (When GUIDE Plus+ service 

starts in your area, set the postal code again.)


If digital broadcasts start in your area, please set the 

EPG Type Select setting in the Initial Setup menu to 

Digital EPG. 

• Even if you can’t use the EPG functions where you 

live, you can still set VIDEO Plus+ recordings and 

manual recordings — see Setting a manual recording 

on page 69. 

• The front panel display shows EPG when receiving 

data. If you power on the recorder during an EPG 

download, the download is cancelled. 

• EPG data may be received several times a day. All 

updates are automatic. 

• When downloading EPG data, the recorder may 

sound as though it is on. This is normal. 

Checking the downloaded data the 

following day 

GUIDE 1 Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen. 

You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV 

listings information. Use the / buttons to review the 

list. If you notice that there are channels missing, or that 

there are channels in the list that you don’t get, go to the 

Editor screen: 

• Press repeatedly until the Menu bar is highlighted. 

• Press until Editor is highlighted. The main area of 

the screen now shows a list of channels. Those that 

are turned ON are displayed in the grid; those that 

are OFF are hidden. Use the /// buttons to 

move down the list and turn channels ON or OFF as 

necessary. 

• For any channel that you turn ON, the GUIDE Plus+ 

system will need to know how it is received (the 

source) and on which programme number. The 

source may be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or 

an external receiver. The programme number is the 

number on which the channel can be found on its 

receiving device/source. The entry in the Editor 

screen must match this number for correct 

recording of that channel. 

• The above is especially important for the ‘host 

channel’. Please make sure that the host channel is 

always switched ON. 

SETUP /TUNE+ 

1 2 

SR+ 

3 

/ST– /ST+ 

4 

ENTER 

5 6 


7 8 9 

ADVANCED 

2 0 Change the programme numbers as you 

like. 

Changing the programme numbers allows you to decide 

the order in which the channels change when stepping 

through them sequentially. You can do this to group 

certain channels together, for example. 

Name On/Off Source Prog. No. 

BBC1 

On D. TV 001 

BBC2 On D. TV 002 

ITV On D. TV 003 

CH4 On D. TV 004 


BBC3 On Ext. Rec. 1 007 

ITV2 On D. TV 006 

E4 Off D. TV 014 

UKGOL On 

D. TV 017 

3 When you’re done, press the BLUE Action button 

(Home) to get back to the GUIDE Plus+ home screen. 

• You can find detailed information on using the GUIDE 

Plus+ system in the following chapter. 

61 

En

04 

62 

En 

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide 

Chapter 4 

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic 

programme guide 

This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select 

setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup 

menu) is set to GUIDE Plus+. 

The GUIDE Plus+ system 

The GUIDE Plus+® system* is a free, interactive onscreen 

television programming guide. 1 The system 

provides programme listings for all major channels, onetouch 

recording, searching by genre, recommendations 

according to your profile and more. The GUIDE Plus+ 

system is a convenient way to find out what’s on right 

now or during the coming week, by channel or by genre. 

The GUIDE Plus+ system also allows you to 

automatically set your viewing and recording selections 

quickly and easily. 

In order to receive the correct TV listings information for 

your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE 

Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information. 

If you haven’t already done this, please turn to Setting up 

the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 59 before 

proceeding. 

* GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW, VIDEO Plus+, G-LINK are (1) 

registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured 

under license from and (3) subject of various international 

patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to, 

Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related 

affiliates. 

Legal Notice 

GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS 

RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE 

ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAMME SCHEDULE INFORMATION 

PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL 

GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS 

RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS 

REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR 

INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN 

CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY 

INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE 

GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. 

Using the GUIDE Plus+ system 

All the various features and areas are colour-coded for 

ease of navigation. All screens (with the exception of 

some setup screens) have the following common 

elements: 

1 Video window – Allows you to continue watching 

the current programme while using the GUIDE 

Plus+ system. 

2 Information panels – Display programme 

promotions or instructions on the GUIDE Plus+ 

system. 

3 Action bar – Colour-coded Action buttons change 

function depending on the area. 

4 Information box – Shows short programme 

descriptions or help menus. 

5 Menu bar – Gives access to the various areas of the 

GUIDE Plus+ system. 

6 Grid – Shows TV listings information for the next 

seven days by channel and time. 

Note 

1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line System on page 137). 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide 04 

GUIDE Plus+ navigation 

The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons 

you’ll use to navigate the GUIDE Plus+ system. 

Key What it does 

REC Press to set or cancel One Button 

Recording. 

GUIDE Press to display the GUIDE Plus+ screen 

(also use to exit). 

/// Use to navigate screens (highlight an 

item). 

RED, GREEN, 

YELLOW, BLUE 

Action buttons that change functionality 

depending on the Area. 

MENU Press to jump directly to the Menu bar. 

TIMER REC Press to go directly to the Schedule area. 

INFO Press to display extended information for 

the current programme. 

ENTER Press to confirm a selection or to leave 

the GUIDE Plus+ screen. 

Number 

buttons 

PREV/ 

NEXT 

Use for numeric entry. 

Press to select the previous/next page of 

information (in the grid, for example). 

/ Press to select the previous/next day. 

One-Button-Record 

The RED Action button (Record) is visible anytime you 

can highlight a programme title, including from the Grid, 

after a search, or in your recommendations in the My TV 

area. 

The programme name, date, channel, recording start 

and end times are all set automatically when you set a 

timer recording using One-Button-Record. 

If you need to, you can edit the settings at any time before 

the recording is due to start (see Editing a scheduled 

recording on page 67). 

1 Highlight a programme title. 

2 Press the RED Action button (Record). 

The programme is now set for recording. When the 

programme is due to start, the recorder will switch to the 

correct channel and start recording 1 . 

• You can also use the REC button to set the 

recording. 

• You can review the shows you have set to record in 

the Schedule Area (see also The Schedule Area on 

page 67). 

Lock/Unlock video window 

When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system, the channel 

you were watching remains visible in the video window. 

The date stamp above the window lets you know the 

channel, date and time. 

The default setting for this window is ‘locked’, as 

indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video 

window. When locked, the video window always shows 

the channel you were previously watching as you move 

up and down through the listings grid. 

If you prefer, you can unlock the video window so that as 

you highlight different channels in the listings grid, that 

channel is shown in the video window. 

Note 

1 Recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in the programme 

broadcast schedules. 

63 

En

04 

64 

En 


1 Highlight a channel logo. 

Channel logos are displayed to the left of programme 

titles. 

2 Press the RED Action button (Unlock). 

The padlock icon above the video window becomes 

unlocked. It remains unlocked for the remainder of your 

current TV viewing session. 

If you want to lock the video window again, follow the 

same procedure. The RED Action button will now act as 

Lock. 

Channel mosaic screen 

You can switch the display style of channels in the Grid 

Area, Schedule Area or My TV Area from a list to a mosaic 

of channel icons by pressing the YELLOW Action button. 

Select the channel icon you want using the cursor 

buttons, then press ENTER to return to the previous 

screen on that channel. 

Areas 

The GUIDE Plus+® system consists of seven Areas. All 

Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar. 

• Grid – The GUIDE Plus+ system Home Area. 

Displays TV listings information for the next seven 

days by time and channel. 

• Search – Search for TV programmes by category 

(e.g., Sport), subcategory (e.g., Football) or keyword. 

• My TV – Set up a profile and receive 

recommendations according to your preferences. 

• Schedule – Show all scheduled recordings. 

• Info – Area for additional information, such as 

weather (not available in all regions). 

• Editor – Change channel settings. 

• Setup – Setup the GUIDE Plus+® system. 

The Grid Area 

The Grid is the main TV listings screen of the GUIDE 

Plus+ system and is the first screen that you see when 

you press GUIDE. You can see TV listings for the next 

seven days, starting with the current day. 

When you highlight a programme in the Grid, you can 

see information about it in the Information Box, including 

title, synopsis, channel, source, time and length. If there 

is an i symbol in the Information Box, it means that there 

is an extended synopsis available. Press the INFO button 

to see it. 

In some countries, you can also see a rating for a 

particular programme (mostly movies). These ratings are 

provided by local partners, such as TV magazines. 

From the Grid Area you can: 

• View and scroll through programme listings 

• Read programme synopses 

• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing 1 

• Set a programme to record 

• Lock or unlock the video window 

• Access Information panels 

Browsing the Grid 

Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid: 

/// (cursor buttons) – Navigate the Grid 

PREV/ NEXT – Previous / next page 

/ – Previous / next day 

BLUE Action button – Return to the current time/date in 

the Grid 

ENTER – Press on the current selection to exit the GUIDE 

Plus+ system and start watching the programme 

The Search Area 

From the Search Area you can: 

• Search by category 

• Search by subcategory 

• Search by keyword 


• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing 



Note 

1 If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds while it tunes to the channel. 

This is normal.


Searching 

You can search for programmes by category, 

subcategory or by keyword (My Choice). Categories for 

searching include Movies (purple), Sport (green), 

Children (blue) and Others (teal). In some countries there 

is a further subcategory available called ‘Tip of the Day’. 

These are programmes recommended by a local partner, 

such as a TV magazine. 

1 Select ‘Search’ from the Menu bar. 

2 Select a category and a subcategory. 

• If you choose All as the subcategory, all programmes 

in the category you selected will show up in the 

search results. 

ENTER 3 Start the search. 

The search results are shown sorted by time and date. 

• If no search results are displayed, it means there are 

no programmes for the current day that match your 

search criteria. 

Using My Choice keywords for a search 

In addition to the standard categories, you can also set 

your own keywords. 

1 Access My Choice. 

2 Press the YELLOW Action button to add a keyword. 

ENTER 

3 Enter a keyword to appear in the menu. 

When you’re finished, press the GREEN Action button to 

exit and continue. 

ENTER 

4 Start the keyword search. 

• You can delete or edit keywords using the RED and 

GREEN Action buttons. 

• When you have set more than two keywords, an All 

subcategory automatically appears which allows you 

to search for all your keywords. 

65 

En

04 

66 

En 


My TV Area 

The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile. You 

can define a profile by channels, themes and/or keywords. 

As soon as a personal profile has been set, the GUIDE 

Plus+ system continuously scans the TV listings for the 

next seven days. Whenever you access the My TV Area, a 

list of programmes matching your profile appears. 

From the My TV Area you can: 

• Set up a profile by channel, theme and/or keyword 

• Edit and delete profiles 


• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing 



Setting up a profile 

You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16 

channels, four categories and 16 keywords. 

1 Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar. 

2 Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile. 

Channels is now highlighted. 

3 To add a channel to your profile, press the 

YELLOW Action button. 

Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and 

press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels. 

4 To add a category to your profile, highlight 

‘Categories’ and press the YELLOW Action button. 

Select a category from the Search Area categories and 

press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to four categories. 

5 To add a keyword to your profile, highlight 

‘Keywords’ and press the YELLOW Action button. 

Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select 

characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you’re 

finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and 

continue. 

6 Press ENTER to activate your profile. 

• You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step 5. 

• You can edit or delete your profile using the RED and 

GREEN Action buttons.


The Schedule Area 

The Schedule Area is where you can set, see, edit and 

delete scheduled (timer) recordings. 

From the Schedule Area you can: 

• Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording 

• Set, edit or delete a VIDEO Plus+ recording 

• Set, edit or delete a manual recording 

Editing a scheduled recording 

You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording, or 

delete it if you no longer require it 1 . 

1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording. 

• If you only want to edit the recording quality, 

frequency, destination, timing or genre settings, skip 

to step 5 below. 

2 Press the GREEN Action button (Edit). 

3 Use the cursor and number buttons to edit the 

recording date, start time, end time and channel. 

Use the / buttons or the number buttons to edit. 

Press the GREEN Action button to go to continue, or the 

RED Action button to go back. 

4 Enter a name for the scheduled recording. 

Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select 

characters from the on-screen keyboard. 

After entering the whole name, press the GREEN Action 

button to continue. 

5 Highlight the right recording tile. 

6 Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change 

the recording quality. 

Select from AUTO 2 , XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP or a manual 

recording mode (see Manual Recording on page 142 and 

Manual recording modes on page 151). 

Note 

1 See About timer recordings on page 86 for more information about scheduled recordings. 

2 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD. 

67 

En

04 

68 

En 


7 Press the GREEN Action button (Frequency) to 

change the recording frequency. 

Select from the various options for one-time, daily and 

weekly recordings. 

8 Press YELLOW Action button (Destination) to 

select the recording destination. 

Select from DVD, HDD or HDDr (Auto Replace 

Recording) 1 . 

• Auto Replace Recording is only available as an 

option with regular daily or weekly recordings. 

9 Press to access the extended recording options. 

• If you want to record to a particular HDD genre, use 

the YELLOW Action button (Genre) to select one. 

• Use the GREEN Action button (Timing) to add extra 

time to the end of the recording (+0, +10, +20, +30 or 

VPS/PDC 2 (V–P)). 

• Press to display the standard recording options 

again. 

Deleting a scheduled recording 

1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording. 

2 Press the RED Action button (Delete). 

The scheduled event is deleted. 

Note 

1• For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 142) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the 

recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality (MN4 for 

DVD+R/+RW) then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead. 

• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully. 

• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will 

not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programmes will be erased. 

2• If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to 

work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby. 

• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on. 

• Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC. 

• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO.


Setting a VIDEO Plus+® recording 

1 Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar. 

2 Press the RED Action button (VIDEO Plus+). 

3 Use the number buttons to enter a PlusCode 

programming number. 

• If you live in an area not yet covered by the GUIDE 

Plus+ system you may also have to input a channel 

number. Follow the on-screen display to do this. 

4 Press ENTER to confirm. 

Please enter the PlusCode programming number and press 

ENTER to confirm. 

Setting a manual recording 

1 Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar. 

2 Press the GREEN Action button (Manual). 

3 Use the number and /// buttons to enter 

the recording date, then press the GREEN Action 

button (Next). 

4 In the same way, enter the recording start time, 

followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to 

confirm. 

5 Enter the recording end time in the same way, 

followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to 

confirm. 

69 

En

04 

70 

En 


6 Use the number buttons to enter a channel 

number, then press the GREEN Action button (Next) 

to confirm. 

Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW Action button 

(Mosaic) and use the /// buttons to select a 

channel from the mosaic, followed by ENTER. 

The Info Area 

This area is reserved for additional information such as 

news, weather reports, stock quotes, and so on, and 

varies by region. (Note that this feature is not available in 

all countries/regions.) 

The Editor Area 

The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage 

your channels. Any changes you make here will affect 

what is displayed in the Grid Area. The Editor Area is 

mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to 

make any manual changes as necessary. 

You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become 

available in your area, or if you change from cable to 

satellite, say, or move house. 

From the Editor Area you can: 

• Display/hide channels in the grid (switch the channel 

on/off) 

• Select a channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1, 

Ext. Rec. 2, etc.) 

• Enter a channel programme number 

Switching a channel on/off 

You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the 

Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor 

Area. 

1 Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar. 


D.TV 001 BBC1 

On D. TV 001 








UKGOL On D. TV 017 

2 Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you 

want to switch on or off. 

3 Press the RED Action button to switch the 

channel on or off. 

Changing the source and programme number 

1 Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar. 


BBC1 

On D. TV 001 








UKGOL On 

D. TV 017 

2 Highlight the right channel tile of the channel 

you want to make a change to. 

3 Press the RED Action button to change the 

channel source, or the GREEN Action button to enter 

a programme number. 

Each press of the RED Action button changes the 

channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1, etc.). To set a 

programme number, use the number buttons to enter a 

programme number then press ENTER (When set to 

A.TV or D.TV, make sure that the programme number 

matches the preset number of this recorder for what you 

want to record). 

The Setup Area 

The Setup Area is where you can set up the GUIDE Plus+ 

system for your particular region, TV reception 

conditions, and so on.


Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+ setup 

1 Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar. 

2 Highlight the part you want to change. 

You can change the Language, Country, Postal Code 1 

and the External Receiver settings. 

3 Press ENTER to confirm. 

Press ENTER to access the Basic Setup screen. 

Basic Setup 

Host Channel Setup 

GUIDE Plus+ System Information 

You can reset the Host Channel settings at any time back 

to the default setting of automatic. Please be aware that 

resetting the Host Channel will erase all TV listings data. 

GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and 

troubleshooting 

This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list 

please consult the GUIDE Plus+ website at: 

www.europe.guideplus.com 

FAQ 

• When I tried setting up my external receiver I could not 

get any of the attempts to work, what should I do? 

There could be several reasons why your external 

receiver could not be controlled. 

– The connections could be wrong. Make sure that 

the G-LINK cable is connected to the G-LINK 

connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in 

front of the external receiver, pointing towards the IR 

receiver of your external receiver. See Connecting to a 

cable box or satellite receiver on page 51. 

– The code that is listed under your brand could be 

wrong. Please try other codes for your brand under 

satellite, cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area and 

choose one of the three options (cable, satellite or 

terrestrial) that you have not already tried. Follow the 

on-screen prompts to make sure that the GUIDE 

Plus+ system can change channels on your external 

receiver. If it does not work, repeat the process, 

choosing different reception and external receiver 

combinations until you have tried all the codes for 

your brand of receiver that are already in the GUIDE 

Plus+ system. If it still does not work, see below on 

how to receive new codes overnight. 

– The unit has not yet received new codes. The nightly 

data downloads frequently include new codes for 

controlling external receivers. Please tune your 

external receiver to your local host channel and leave 

it on overnight. Switch this recorder into standby. The 

next morning, please perform the GUIDE Plus+ 

setup again to see if your external receiver can now 

be controlled. 

– The external receiver that you use is currently not 

supported. If, after leaving your external receiver on 

overnight, and doing the Reception and External 

Receiver Setup again, it still does not respond, please 

call Customer Support to report your brand and 

model. 

Manual Host Channel setup 

The GUIDE Plus+ system will automatically identify your 

Host Channel as soon as the recorder is put into standby 

for the first time. See the table on page 60 for a list of all 

the European Host Channels. 

If you know your Host Channel details (source and 

programme number) or if the automatic identification 

did not provide the expected result, you can identify your 

Host Channel manually. Select Host Channel Setup in 

the Setup area and follow the instructions on the TV. 

Select the correct source (e.g., internal tuner or external 

receiver) and enter the respective programme number 

(e.g., if you have to press 9 on the remote to watch your 

Host Channel, enter 9 as the programme number). When 

you next switch the recorder into standby the GUIDE 

Plus+ system will complete the Host Channel setup. 

Note 

1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information. This can take up to 24 hours. 

71 

En

04 

72 

En 


• My external receiver was successfully setup. However 

I have found that when the GUIDE Plus+ system has 

to change to a channel with a three-digit programme 

number in the external receiver’s preset, it does not 

work. It looks like the GUIDE Plus+ system can only 

send two digits. 

With the number of channels increasing, the number 

of digits has increased as well. While older boxes use 

only two digits, newer boxes require up to four. It is 

possible that you selected an older code for your 

brand during set-up. Please access the Setup Area, 

select External Receiver and repeat the setup for your 

brand (Note: Every time you see the on-screen 

question about whether the receiver has changed to 

a certain channel, the GUIDE Plus+ system has sent 

a different code). Try all the different codes until your 

GUIDE Plus+ system can control your external 

receiver correctly. If you have no success, try to 

receive new codes overnight. 

•I used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or 

analog cable without a set-top box. Now, I have 

“upgraded” to a satellite system or to digital cable with 

external receiver. What should I do to receive data for 

the GUIDE Plus+ system? 

You can try to receive your host channel through your 

new reception method. If you have problems to 

receive data we recommend that you keep your 

analog terrestrial or cable connection only to receive 

data this way. It is important that you identify your 

host channel correctly in the Editor Area. 

• After I performed the initial set-up I found that the lineup 

for all the channels received via the external set top 

box is incorrect. How do I correct this? 

You can change the line-up in the editor according to 

your preferences. Access the Editor Area. Select the 

channels that you would like to change. Change the 

source and preset number according to your 

preferences. 

•I performed the set-up but after many hours I still have 

a blank EPG what is going wrong? 

There are several possibilities: 

– Connections are wrong. See Connections on 

page 48 to double check everything. 

– The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was completed 

incorrectly. Try setting it up again (see Setting up the 

GUIDE Plus+® system on page 59). 

– Your cabling and setup is OK, but the recorder has 

not been connected for enough time to receive the TV 

listings data. Leave the recorder in standby overnight. 

– For external receiver users only: The connections 

and setup are OK, but the external receiver was not 

tuned to the correct host channel. Check the list of 

host channels (see step 5 of Setting up the GUIDE 

Plus+® system on page 59) and leave the recorder 

in standby and the external receiver on overnight 

tuned to the correct host channel. 

– You live in a country/region where the GUIDE Plus+ 

system is not yet available. Check the list of countries 

to see if you are in a region that is supported. 

•I used the One-Button-Record feature (red Action 

button) to set a recording, but I recorded the wrong 

channel. 

If the channel to be recorded is received via the 

external receiver first make sure that the external 

receiver was left switched on. Next, in the Editor 

Area, make sure that the channel to be recorded is 

correctly set: Access the Editor Area. Check the 

source and programme number of the channel that 

you wanted to record. Change the source and preset 

numbers if incorrect. 

If you are recording from the recorder’s internal tuner 

(the A.TV or D.TV setting), make sure that the 

programme number is the same as the preset 

number set on this recorder. If they are different, go 

to the Editor Area and change the programme 

number to match the recorder’s preset number. 

• The TV listings information doesn’t update. 

The latest TV listings information is automatically 

downloaded by the recorder overnight. This only 

happens if the recorder is in standby; if the recorder 

is left on, it will not download. When not using the 

recorder, please switch it into standby. 

Data downloads can take several hours. The front 

panel display shows EPG when downloading. If you 

switch the recorder on while EPG is displayed, the 

download will be cancelled. 

• The GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in my area, 

but when I switch the recorder into standby, after a 

while the front panel display shows EPG. Can I stop 

this from happening? 

If the GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in your 

area, please do not set the postal code in the GUIDE 

Plus+ setup (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® 

system on page 59). When the GUIDE Plus+ service 

starts in your area, please set the postal code again. 

• The automatic Host Channel search failed or the 

GUIDE Plus+ system identified the wrong Host 

Channel for my region. 

You can identify your Host Channel manually. See 

Manual Host Channel setup on page 71 for how to do 

this.

Using the digital electronic programme guide 05 

Chapter 5 

Using the digital electronic 

programme guide 

This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select 

setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup 

menu) is set to Digital EPG. 

The Digital EPG system 

The Digital EPG shows a table of scheduled digital TV 

programmes and detailed information about individual 

programmes. It also allows you easily to select and tune 

to a particular programme. 1 

The Digital EPG screen consists of programme 

Information, Channel List and General Programme List. 

This section describes information displayed in the 

schedule and information windows. 

Note that the recorder’s clock must be set to the correct 

time and date to ensure all relevant EPG information is 

displayed. 

General Programme List 

D007 

1 Appears when the schedule table can be scrolled 

forward or backward 

2 Time schedule 

3 Channel list 

4 Highlights the currently selected channel 

5 Indicates the programme set for recording 

6 Appears when other programmes (often short ones) 

have been scheduled for the same period 

7 Programme title 

8 Time dividers 

Note 

1 EPG information is only viewable for D.TV programmes that provide EPG information. 

• The general programme list may show sections 

whose bottom right corners have been folded. This 

indicates that other programmes have been 

scheduled for that period. To view the title of such a 

programme and related information, highlight a 

folded section, and then press /. 

Programme information 

D007 

1 Channel number 

2 Station name 

3 Programme title 

4 Appear when other programmes have been 

scheduled for the same period 

5 Programme schedule 

6 Programme genre 

73 

En

05 

74 

En 

Using the digital electronic programme guide 

Using the Digital EPG 

Using the Digital EPG you can check the schedule of 

digital TV programmes, view information about desired 

programmes, and/or select programmes. 

GUIDE 

1 Press to display the Digital EPG screen. 

The EPG screen updates automatically if the EPG data is 

acquired successfully. If not, the Digital EPG screen 

shows a blank image. 

2 Select a TV programme. 

D007 

• Press PREV/ NEXT to skip to the next or 

previous channel list page. 

• Information about the selected programme appears 

in the information window. 1 

• To watch a programme currently on air, select the 

programme (then press ENTER). 

• You can check information about programmes 

scheduled up to one week ahead, depending on 

conditions. 

• Depending on conditions, it may take some time to 

acquire EPG data. 

INFO 

3 Press to view more information about the 

selected programme. 

Detailed information appears in the schedule window. 

If the screen contains further information, More ... is 

displayed. 

Note 

1 The general programme list does not show programmes that have already finished. 

2 For more information on timer programmes, see About timer recordings on page 86. 

• To quit the display of detailed information, press 

INFO again (or RETURN/EXIT). 

D007 ************ 

************* 

************************** 

4 GUIDE Press to exit the Digital EPG screen. 

Setting timer programmes 

Using the Digital EPG, it’s easy to set digital TV 

programmes for recording 2 . 

GUIDE 1 Press to display the Digital EPG screen. 

2 Select a programme. 

D007 

ENTER 

13:40 -14:05 

More... 

• Select a programme currently on-air: press ENTER to 

close the Digital EPG screen and watch the channel 

immediately, or press RED to set the programme for 

recording immediately. 

• Select a programme not yet started then press 

ENTER or RED to set the programme for recording.


3 Enter the timer recording settings. 

Use the / buttons to select a field; use the / 

buttons to change the value 1 . 

Timer Programme Set 

Manhattan Open Tennis 

CH Date Start Stop Extend 

D.TV003 SUN 1/4 18:00 19:00 Off 

Detailed Settings Enter Details 

Record To HDD 

Recording Mode XP 

VPS/PDC ------ 

Auto Replace Rec. ------ 

Genre No Category 

Store Programme 

Set Detailed 

Set Title Name 

Cancel 

VPS/PDC 0/8 

• CH – Choose a channel (Pr 1 to Pr 99 for analog 

channels and available digital channels (excluding 

skip channels)), or one of the external inputs from 

which to record. 

• Date – Choose a date up to one month in advance, or 

select a daily or weekly programme. 

• Start – Set the recording start time. 

• Stop – Set the recording end time (maximum length 

of a timer recording is 24 hours). 

• Extend – Extend the end time of the timer recording 

(select Off, 10, 20 or 30 mins.) 

4 If you want to change the recording mode, 

recording destination, etc., select ‘Set Detailed’. 

In this area you can set: 

Record to – Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD 

for DVD recording 2 . 

Recording Mode – Select from AUTO 3 , XP, SP, LP, EP, 

SLP, SEP (See Setting the picture quality/recording time on 

page 83). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also 

select the LPCM setting, XP+ or MN (press ENTER then 

use the / buttons to select the level). 

VPS/PDC 4 – Choose whether or not to use VPS/PDC 

when making timer recordings of analog programmes 

(see About timer recordings on page 86). 

Auto Replace Rec. – Automatically erases the previous 

daily or weekly recording when the next one is recorded. 

Genre – Select a record genre (for HDD recording only). 

EPG Link 5 (UK only) – Choose whether or not to have this 

device automatically record scheduled programmes 

from the Digital EPG even if the times in which they are 

broadcast change. 

Series Recording6 (UK only) – Choose whether or not to 

record all programmes from a series when you make a 

recording from the Digital EPG (for HDD recordings only). 

5 After entering all the timer recording information, 

highlight ‘Store Programme’ and press ENTER. 

A red clock icon appears for the programme. 

6 GUIDE 

Press to exit the Digital EPG screen. 

Tip 

• To enter a title name for the timer recording in 

advance, select Set Title Name and follow the onscreen 

display. 

Note 

1 You cannot change the CH, Date, Start, Stop, Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On (see below). 

2• For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 142) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the 

recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality (MN4 for 

DVD+R/+RW) then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead. 

• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully. 

• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will 

not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programmes will be erased. 

3 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD. 

4• If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to 

work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby. 

• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on. 

• Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC. 

• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO. 

5• You cannot set an EPG Link when recording mode is set to AUTO. 

• You cannot change the CH, Date, Start, Stop, Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On. 

• When you have EPG Link set to On and you set a timer recording for a programme that is divided into multiple parts, all parts of that 

programme are recorded automatically. In the programme list, the earliest part of the programme to be recorded has a red icon, with 

successive parts indicated by a gray icon. Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as divided 

programmes. 

6• In the programme list, the earliest programme to be recorded has a red icon, with successive programmes indicated by a gray icon. 

• There is a limit to the number of programmes you can schedule to record with the Series Recording function. 

• Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as part of a series. 

75 

En

05 

76 

En 


Editing a timer programme 

You can change any of the settings in a timer programme 

before the recording is due to start. Even if a programme 

is currently being recorded, you can program a new end 

time or edit its extend time parameter. 

TIMER REC 

1 Press to display the Timer Programme 

View screen. 

You can also access the Timer Programme View screen 

from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Timer 

Recording, then Timer Recording). 

This screen shows all the timer programmes currently set. 

Timer Programme View 

SUN 25/3 15:00 

VPS/PDC 0/8 Tmr Pgms 3/32 

Manhattan Open Tennis OK 

SUN 25/3 18:00 – 19:00 Pr 4 

World Journey OK 

MON 26/3 19:30 – 21:00 Pr 6 

Flower Until 20/4 

MON – FRI 13:30 – 14:00 

New Input 

Pr 8 

HDD Remain 

DVD Remain 

59h59m(SP) 

1h59m(SP) 

• Each row is for one timer recording programme, with 

the date and time information, channel, recording 

mode, DVD or HDD and recording status. 

• The amount of free space available on the HDD and 

the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown 

towards the bottom of the screen. 

• In the upper-right corner, the number of timer 

programmes already set is shown next to Tmr Pgms. 

• If there are more than five timer programmes already 

set, press NEXT to switch page (go back using 

the PREV button). 

• You can also delete a timer programme before it’s 

started (before the recorder enters timer recording 

standby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR. See 

also Deleting a timer programme on page 77. 

2 Highlight the timer programme you 

want to change. 

If you want to set a new timer programme, select ‘New 

Input’ and skip to step 4. 

ENTER 

3 Press then select ‘Modify’ from the 

command menu panel. 

Alternatively, press ENTER. 

The Timer Programme Set screen appears from which 

you can edit the settings. 

ENTER 

4 Enter the timer recording settings. 

Use the / buttons to select a field; use the / 

buttons to change the value. For more information on the 

options available at the Timer Programme Set screen, 

See Setting timer programmes on page 74. 

ENTER 

5 After entering all the timer recording 

information, highlight ‘Store Programme’ and press 

ENTER. 

The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The 

timer programme you just input appears in the list. The 

rightmost column shows various timer recording status 

messages: 

• OK – Can be recorded. 

• Time Over – Not enough space on the HDD (the 

recording won’t finish). 

• Over 12h – Recording time of over 12 hours set 

(when recording to the HDD the recording will be 

split into two titles). 

• Overlap – Two timer programmes partially or 

completely overlap. The one starting earlier will take 

priority. 

• Until ... (eg., Until 13/8) – For a regular recording, 

the last programme that could be recorded is shown. 

• Data Over – Can’t record because the disc 

management area of the disc is full. 

• Cancel Once – A regular timer programme is set to 

skip. 

• Can’t Rec – Not possible to record. 

• Title Over – Can’t record because there is already 

the maximum number of titles on the disc (HDD: 999; 

DVD: 99). 

• Recording – The programme is currently recording. 

• Standby – The recorder is in timer recording standby. 

• Valid Until ... (eg., Valid Until 13/8) (UK only) – When 

you have set to make a series recording of a 

programme that has no new scheduled broadcasts, 

the date displayed indicates the last day until which 

the scheduled programme settings remain valid. (If 

the programme is not broadcast for over 13 weeks, its 

settings are automatically deleted.) 

• No Broadcast (UK only) – Displays when a 

programme for which you had the EPG Link set to On 

does not record because the date of the scheduled 

recording has already passed. 

• nothing displayed – Another timer recording or 

copying is in progress. 

6 HOME MENU 

Press to exit the timer recording screen.


Note 

• If you set a DVD timer recording but there is no 

recordable DVD disc loaded, or the disc loaded 

doesn’t have enough free space for the complete 

recording, Recovery is shown. In this case (unless 

you load a suitable disc before the recording actually 

starts), the recorder will use the HDD for recording. 

(The message Can’t Rec will appear if there are 

already 999 titles on the HDD or if there is not enough 

free space on the HDD for recording.) 

• When you have EPG Link or Series Recording set to 

On, any changes in broadcast time or division of 

broadcasts are automatically accommodated for and 

your scheduled recordings are carried out without 

any additional settings. As a result, even when you 

have not scheduled programmes to record at the 

same time, changes in broadcasting schedules can 

cause scheduled recordings to overlap. 

Deleting a timer programme 

You can delete timer programmes you no longer need. 

TIMER REC 

1 Press TIMER REC. 


want to erase. 

ENTER 

3 Press then select ‘Erase’ from the 


• Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel. 

• You can also just press CLEAR when the timer 

programme is highlighted. 

Skipping a regular timer programme 

If you’ve set a regular daily or weekly timer programme, 

you can set the recorder to skip the next scheduled 

recording. 

TIMER REC 



want to skip. 

Note 

1• Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster. 

• This function may not be applicable to all programmes. 

ENTER 

3 Press then select ‘Cancel Once’ from 

the command menu panel. 

• In the timer programme list, Cancel Once appears by 

the programme. 

• You can also just press PAUSE when the timer 

programme is highlighted. 

Checking for alternative broadcast times 

(UK only) 

You can check to see if a programme you have scheduled 

to record is airing at an alternative time slot 1 . 

TIMER REC 



want to search. 

ENTER 

3 Press then select ‘Alternate Search’ 

from the command menu panel. 

• The search results are displayed. Choose the 

programme you would like to record and press either 

the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording. 

Searching for series 

(UK only) 

You can search for broadcasts of programmes of the 

same series as a programme you have scheduled to 

record 1 . 

TIMER REC 




ENTER 

3 Press then select ‘Series Search’ from 

the command menu panel. 

• The search results are displayed. Choose the 

programme you would like to record and press either 

the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording. 

77 

En

05 

78 

En 


Searching for recommendations 

(UK only) 

You can search for recommended programmes 

generated from the content of the programmes you have 

scheduled to record 1 . 

TIMER REC 




ENTER 

3 Press then select ‘Recommendation 

Search’ from the command menu panel. 

The search results are displayed. Choose the programme 

you would like to record and press either the RED button 

or ENTER to schedule a recording. 

Other useful EPG functions 

EPG Jump 

1 Press GREEN when the Digital EPG screen 

(Programme List, Detailed information or Search 

Result) is displayed. 

2 In the ‘Date’ field select a date (within 

one week) to jump to. 

Date 

Time 

3 In the ‘Time’ field select a time of the 

day (0:00 to 23:00) to jump to. 

ENTER 

Jump 

Mon.13.Sep 

14:00 

Cancel 

4 Select ‘Jump’. 

The Programme List for the specified day and time is 

displayed. 

Note 

1• Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster. 

• This function may not be applicable to all programmes. 

EPG Search 

1 Press YELLOW when the EPG screen (Programme 

List, Detailed information or Search Result) is 

displayed. 

2 In the ‘Date’ field select a date (within 

one week) to search in. 

Date 

Time 

Genre 

• 

• 

• 

0/16 

3 In the ‘Time’ field select the time of day 

(0:00 to 23:00) to search in. 

4 In the ‘Genre’ field, select the genre to 

search for. 

You can search for multiple genres by pressing ENTER 

after each genre. 

ENTER 

5 Select ‘OK’. 

ENTER 

6 Select ‘Search’. 

The results of your search are displayed. 

• 

• 

• 

Search 

Sun.12.Sep 

12:00 

Select 

Cancel

Recording 06 

Chapter 6 

Recording 

About DVD recording 

This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, 

DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL media. 

DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for Video 

mode or VR mode recording. Each has its advantages, 

and it depends on what you want to do with the recording 

which mode you choose. 

If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way, 

VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying, 

and changing the way the video is presented. 

Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but 

it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard 

DVD players (many of which won’t play VR mode discs 1 ). 

Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all 

recording on that disc will be in that mode. 

DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR mode recording. 

DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR mode recording. 

DVD+R discs do not require initializing. 

Important 

• The table below shows the maximum number of titles 

recordable per disc and the maximum number of 

chapters per title: 

Disc type/rec. format 

DVD-R/-RW 

Video mode 

DVD-R/-RW/-RAM 

VR mode 

Max. titles 

(per disc) 

*1 A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc. 

*2 

A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc. 

Max. chapters 

(per title) 

99 99 

99 999 *1 

DVD+R/+RW 49 99 *2 

• This recorder cannot play or record unfinalized DVD 

-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R discs recorded on 

another recorder. DVD+RW discs recorded on 

another recorder are playable on this recorder but are 

not recordable. 

• The maximum continuous recording time for one title 

is eight hours when using a DVD+R/+RW disc. 

• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the 

total number of recordable titles remaining may not 

increase. 

• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, 

NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line 

systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and 

SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also 

Additional information about the TV system settings 

on page 146. 

• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can 

affect playback and/or recording performance. 

Please take proper care of your discs. 

• Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure 

due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the 

recorder. 

• See also Disc/content format playback compatibility 

on page 43 for detailed disc compatibility information. 

Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs 

Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is generally the 

same as recording to regular single-layer discs; however, 

please note the following points: 

• When the recorder switches from the first layer to the 

second during recording a DVD-R DL (Video mode) 

disc, a new title is automatically started on the new 

layer. 

• Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD-R DL (Video 

mode) disc. If the 99th title is being recorded when 

the layer is switched, recording will stop. 

• Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD+R DL disc. 

• You cannot play, record additional material to, edit or 

finalize a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc that has been 

recorded on but not yet finalized on another DVD 

recorder. 

Note 

1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for 

VR mode compatibility information. 

79 

En

06 

80 

En 

Recording 

About HDD recording 

Recording to the hard disk drive (HDD) is very flexible; 

you have the full choice of recording quality options, 

including manual mode, and of course you can record, 

erase and re-record as many times as you like. 

The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can 

store many hours of video on it, even using the higher 

quality recording modes. 

Important 

• The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that 

can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99 

respectively. No more recording is possible on the 

HDD after the maximum number of titles has been 

reached. 

• The maximum continuous recording time for one title 

is 12 hours. 

• It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on 

the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure 

that the Input Line System setting (page 146) 

matches the TV line system of the source you’re 

recording. 

HDD Video mode compatibility 

When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in 

one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD 

Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see 

page 143). 

When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from 

HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW is 

possible. When recording a bilingual broadcast, set 

which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup 

menu (see Bilingual Recording on page 140). 

When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off, 

high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video 

mode) or DVD+R/+RW isn’t possible. However, both 

channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you 

can switch the audio on playback. 

Recorded audio 

In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two 

channel Dolby Digital format (only Dolby Digital 2.0 can 

be recorded; Dolby Digital 5.1 recording is not possible). 

When set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high quality, 

uncompressed Linear PCM format. 

If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording 

to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD+R/+RW, or to the 

HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode 

On, or on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual Recording 

setting (page 140) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel 

to record before recording starts. In other cases, both 

channels of a bilingual broadcast will be recorded and 

you can switch on playback. 

Restrictions on video recording 

You cannot record copy-protected video using this 

recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs 

and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material 

is encountered during a recording, recording will pause 

automatically and an error message will be displayed onscreen. 

Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded to 

DVD-RAM or HDD, CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-R/ 

-RW (see below). 

When recording a TV broadcast or through an external 

input, you can display copy control information on screen 

(see Displaying disc information on-screen on page 99). 

CPRM 

CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed 

for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programmes. 

CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media. 

This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that 

you can record copy-once broadcast programmes, but 

you cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM 

recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD 

-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) 

discs formatted in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the 

HDD. 

DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that 

are specifically compatible with CPRM. 

Recording equipment and copyright 

Recording equipment should be used only for lawful 

copying. You are advised to check carefully what 

constitutes lawful copying in the country in which you are 

making a copy. Copying of copyrighted material such as 

films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal 

exception or consented to by the rightowners. 

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is 

protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other 

intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and 

other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must 

be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home 

and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by 

Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is 

prohibited.

Recording 06 

Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners 

Switching between A.TV and D.TV tuners 

A.TV/D.TV 

• Press to switch between D.TV (digital) and 

A.TV (analog). 

Changing channels 

There are a number of ways to select analog and digital 

TV channels. 1 Note that you can’t change the TV channel 

during playback, recording or during recording standby. 

CHANNEL 

• CHANNEL Smart Jog 

SETUP /TUNE+ 

1 2 

SR+ 

3 

/ST– /ST+ 

4 

ENTER 

5 6 


7 8 9 

• Number buttons 

For example, to select channel 4 (digital channel 

D004), press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34 (digital 

channel D034), press 3, 4, ENTER. 2 

ADVANCED 

0 

• CH +/– buttons on the front panel. 

• For D.TV channels only, you can also use the Channel 

List — see below. 

Tip 

• When changing terrestrial digital broadcast 

channels, channels with a low signal strength may 

result in a black screen being displayed. 

• For other channels, it may take a short while for the 

channel picture to appear, and/or for the channel 

number to appear. 

• In both of the above cases, some improvement may 

be possible by adjusting the antenna. 

Using the D.TV Channel List 

When in D.TV mode, you can call up the on-screen Channel 

List anytime by pressing ENTER. Use the / buttons to 

select a channel, then press ENTER to switch to that channel. 3 

D001 ************ 

D002 ************ 

D003 ****** 

D004 ************ 

D005 **** 

D006 ****** 

Displaying a channel banner 

A channel banner shows programme titles, start and end 

times of the current programme and other channel 

information. The information is updated every minute. 

• Press to display the channel banner for the 

current channel. 

• Use the / buttons to display the channel banner 

for other channels. To switch to the displayed 

banner’s channel, press ENTER. 

• The channel banner displays the Subtitles ( ) and 

Teletext/MHEG ( ) icon if they apply to the selected 

channel. 4 

• To see more detailed channel information, press 

INFO again. 5 

Use the / buttons to display information about 

previous and following programmes. Use the / 

buttons to see information about other channels. 

• If there is still more information to be displayed, 

More ... is displayed; press the BLUE button to see 

the extra information. 

• To hide the channel banner, press RETURN/EXIT. 

Note 

1• If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it. 

• While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes. 

2 Analog channel presets are numbered 1 to 99; digital channel presets are numbered D001 to D999. 

3• If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it. 

• While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes. 

4 Due to inaccurate information provided by the broadcaster, some icons may occasionally be present or absent in error. 

5 Not all channels supply more detailed information. 

INFO 

D001 ************ 

Now ******************** 

Next ************* 

Now ************************ 

Wed.30.Apr 12:46 

11:30 -12:00 

12:00 - 12:30 

11:30 -12:00 

More... 

81 

En

06 

82 

En 

Recording 

Changing D.TV audio languages 

AUDIO 

+ 

• MAIN SUB Press to display the current audio 

language. Press repeatedly to change it to other 

available languages. 

Changing D.TV subtitle languages 

SUBTITLE 

+ 

• MAIN SUB Press to display the current subtitle 

language. Press repeatedly to change it to other 

available languages. 

Using the MHEG application 

(UK only) 

Some stations bring you programmes with the MHEG 

(Multimedia and Hypermedia Expert Group) application 

encoded, letting you experience D.TV interactively. 1 

The channel banner displays an icon ( ) to indicate that 

the MHEG application can be run. 

• Press to start the MHEG application. 2 

+ 

MAIN SUB TEXT 

• You can also use any of the colour buttons. 

• Press TEXT to quit the MHEG application. 

Viewing Teletext 

(European countries except the UK.) 

You can view the Teletext that comes simultaneously with 

certain programmes. 

+ TEXT 

• MAIN SUB Press to display the Teletext. 

• You can also use any of the colour buttons. 

• Press the TEXT button again to hide the Teletext 

screen. 

Changing A.TV audio channels 

You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or 

external input signal. 

AUDIO 

+ 

• MAIN SUB Press to change the audio type. 

The current audio channel is displayed on-screen. 

• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on 

page 140) is set to NICAM and you are watching a 

NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM 

and Regular (non-NICAM) audio. 

• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also 

select the language. 

• You can also select the language for a non-NICAM 

bilingual broadcast. 

• When watching a recording made from an external 

input with Bilingual recording selected (see External 

Audio on page 140), you can switch the audio 

channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R). 

Note 

• When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording 

Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD-R/-RW (Video 

mode), to DVD+R/+RW, or on the LPCM setting, only 

one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In 

this case, decide which language you want to record 

before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording 

setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 140). 

Switching between TV and DVD 

When the recorder is stopped or recording you can 

choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in 

TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’), 

or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV 

mode’). 

During playback or when a menu is being displayed onscreen, 

the sound and video is always routed to your TV 

and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting. 

Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV 

using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature. 

• MAIN 

+ 

SUB TV/DVD 

Switch between TV mode and DVD 

mode. 

Note 

1 If you start recording while the MHEG application is running, the MHEG application screen will also be recorded. To avoid this, quit the 

application first, then start recording. It is not possible to start the MHEG application while recording is in progress. 

2 This function is not available when subtitle display is active. 

NICAM 

Regular 

NICAM A NICAM B 

Regular NICAM A+B 

A (L) B (R) 

A + B (L+R) 

L R 

L+R

Recording 06 

Setting the picture quality/recording 

time 

DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD 

Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set 

the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard 

settings available, which allow you to choose a balance 

between picture quality and recording time. 

When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual 

Recording on page 142), a further option will be available 

(MN1 to MN32, LPCM, or XP+ (a super-high quality HDD 

recording mode that features a transfer rate of around 15 

Mbps) depending on what you set). 

When recording to DVD, MN32 is the highest recording 

quality available. If you select XP+, the recording mode 

will automatically revert to MN32. 

When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the longest 

recording time available. If you select SEP or MN1 to 

MN3, the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP. 

REC MODE 

• Press repeatedly to select the recording 

quality. 

• XP – High quality setting, gives about one hour of 

recording time on a DVD disc. 

• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, used for most 

applications, gives about two hours of recording time 

on a DVD. 

• LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than SP, but 

doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four 

hours. 

• EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than LP, but gives 

about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc. 

• SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but 

gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD 

disc. 

• SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but 

gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD 

disc. 

• MN1 to MN32/LPCM 1 /XP+ 2 – Manual/Linear PCM/ 

XP+ (available only when manual recording is on). 

The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and 

shown on-screen together with the recording time for a 

blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the 

approximate remaining recording time for that disc is 

also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting 

(see On Screen Display on page 144) is Off then this 

information is not displayed.) 

Basic recording from the TV 


Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the 

channel to record, choosing whether to record to the 

HDD or a DVD and selecting the recording quality. 

1 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. 

• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if 

you load a new blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the 

recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc). 

• If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R or a Video 

mode DVD-RW, you must initialize it before 

proceeding (see Initializing recordable DVD discs on 

page 89). 

2 Press to switch between D.TV (digital) and 

A.TV (analog). 

3 CHANNEL Select a TV channel to record. 

The front panel display shows the channel number, or 

channel name if it’s available: 

• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the 

number buttons on the remote to select the channel 

(For channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER). 

• If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the 

CH +/– buttons on the front panel to select the 

channel number. 

4 Set the picture quality/recording time. 

• See Setting the picture quality/recording time above 

for detailed instructions. 

Note 

1 Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio channel 

to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 140). 

2 Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied to DVD, XP+ recordings are 

always copied in real time. 

HDD/DVD 

A.TV/D.TV 

CHANNEL 

REC MODE 

A.TV Channel preset 

83 

En

06 

84 

En 

Recording 

5 MAIN SUB If you’re recording from the A.TV 

tuner, select the audio channel to record. 

See Changing A.TV audio channels on page 82 for more 

on this. 

• When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is 

bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing 

you to switch the audio channel on playback. The 

only exception to this is when the picture quality is set 

to LPCM, in which case you do need to select the 

audio channel before recording. 

6 MAIN SUB If you’re recording from the D.TV 

tuner, select the audio language to record. 

• You may also be able to set which subtitle language 

to record; use SUBTITLE to select. 

• Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be 

changed during the recording of a digital broadcast. 

REC 

7 Start recording. 

If you want to set a recording end time, press the REC 

button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 

minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The 

time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the 

front panel display. When the recording ends, the 

recorder automatically switches into standby if no other 

operation is being performed. 

• To cancel the set recording time, press REC. 

• If you want to pause recording at any time1 

, press 

PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording (If 

recording to the HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a 

new chapter is started after recording restarts). 

STOP REC 

AUDIO 

+ 

AUDIO 

+ 

8 Press to stop recording. 

• If you set the recording time in the previous step, you 

can still stop the recording anytime by pressing 

STOP REC. 

• Recording will stop automatically when there is no 

more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of 

HDD recording (whichever is sooner). 

Tip 

• During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop 

through function. During recording, press the front 

panel CH + button to switch to SCART THRU (loop 

through on), or CH – to switch to SCART NORM (loop 

through off). Loop through is automatically reset to 

off after recording has finished. Note that you can’t 

switch loop through on if recording from the 

AV1 (RGB)-TV connector. 

Note 

1 Except during Chase Play. 

Pause Live TV 

HDD 

The Pause Live TV feature lets you effectively pause a TV 

programme you’re watching. When you’re ready to 

resume watching, just press the PLAY button. 

Setting up for Pause Live TV 

You can use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Linkcompatible 

TV connected using a SCART cable (see TV 

tuner setup for Pause Live TV below), or using this 

recorder’s internal tuner (see Using the recorder’s 

internal tuner for Pause Live TV on page 85). 

TV tuner setup for Pause Live TV 

To use this feature with an external TV tuner, the recorder 

must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable, and 

the AV. Link setting (page 145) should be set to This 

Recorder Only. 2 See also Pause Live TV on page 145 for 

more on this. 

In order to use Pause Live TV, make the following 

connections and settings. 

• Pause Live TV will not work as expected when 

watching TV via an external component such as a 

VCR or digital tuner. It only works with the channel 

selected on the TV. 

Important 

• Pause Live TV only works with the built-in A.TV 

(analog) tuner. It does not work with the D.TV tuner or 

the external inputs. Make sure the Auto Channel 

Setting is set to Download from TV (see Auto 

Channel Setting on page 139). 

1 Connect this recorder to your TV with a SCART 

cable. 

2 Press HOME MENU. 

3 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Options2’ > ‘Pause Live 

TV’ > ‘TV’s Tuner’. 

4 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Analog Tuner’ > ‘Auto 

Channel Setting’ > ‘Download from TV’. 

• If the Download from TV option appears grayed out, 

check the connections to your TV and try again. 

• Depending on your TV, you might have to switch off 

and unplug it for a few moments before plugging it 

back in and switching it on again. 

5 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Recording 06 

Using the recorder’s internal tuner for Pause Live TV 

If you haven’t connected to your TV using a SCART cable 

(or your TV is not compatible with AV Link) you can use 

the recorder’s internal tuner for the Pause Live TV. 

1 Press HOME MENU. 

2 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Options2’ > ‘Pause Live 

TV’ > ‘Recorder’s Tuner’. 

See Pause Live TV on page 145 to do this. 

You can record the channel selected on the recorder. 

Using Pause Live TV 

PAUSE LIVE TV 

1 Start recording the current TV channel. 

Recording continues with playback paused. 

• Note that it may take up to 10 seconds for recording 

to start. 

PLAY 

2 Press to start playback. 

You can also use the scan buttons (/), pause 

( PAUSE) and stop ( STOP) — all without affecting the 

recording. 

Operation table 

Viewing source 

TV/DVD 

Pause Live TV 

DVR source 

mode of DVR function button 

*1 No Chase Play! Warning if you change input this will stop the recording. 

 

3 Press to stop the recording. 

The operation is slightly different depending on the 

viewing source. See the Operation table below for details. 

Tip 

•When the Pause Live TV setting (see page 145) is set to 

TV’s Tuner, you can press PAUSE LIVE TV while the 

recorder is in standby to switch on and immediately 

start recording. When set to Recorder’s Tuner, it is not 

possible to use the Pause Live TV feature from standby. 

• After pressing PAUSE LIVE TV, it will take at least 10 

seconds for the picture to change (during this time, 

all controls except the power button are inoperative). 

(Note that startup from standby is not possible if you 

have selected Recorder’s Tuner in Pause Live TV on 

page 145.) 

• Please note that you can’t record from another 

component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART 

cable to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector 

using the Pause Live TV feature. 

2• Not all TVs support this feature. Check the instructions that came with your TV if you are unsure. 

• This feature will not work unless your TV is compatible with AV Link. See the operating instructions that came with your TV if you’re unsure 

about your TV’s compatibility with this feature. 

STOP REC 

Condition 

TV built-in analog tuner TV – Pause Live TV Preset channel of DVR and TV are matched after 

downloading from TV. 

Direct TV recording*1 Preset channel of DVR and TV are NOT matched after 

downloading from TV. Record TV programme that you’re 

watching. 

TV built-in digital tuner TV – Direct TV recording*1 Preset channel info. in D.TV cannot be shared by DVR even 

after Download from TV. Record TV programme that you’re 

watching. 

External input of TV TV – Direct TV recording*1 Record TV programme that you’re watching. 

DVR built-in analog tuner DVD DVR built-in Pause Live TV 

analog tuner 

DVR built-in digital tuner DVD DVR built-in 

digital tuner 

Pause Live TV 

85 

En

06 

86 

En 

Recording 

About timer recordings 


Using the timer recording features you can program up 

to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer 

recording programmes can be set to record just once, 

every day, or every week. 

You can set the recording quality for your timer recording 

in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the 

added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the 

recording quality for the space available on the disc (if 

recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if 

recording to the HDD). 

You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable 

DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly) 

HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you 

can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to 

automatically replace the previous timer recording with 

the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the 

previous recording made on that timer programme will 

be replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you 

have watched it yet or not. 

You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the 

recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc 

if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set 

(see Optimized Rec on page 142 for more on this). 

Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but 

there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the 

recording, the Recovery Recording feature will 

automatically record the programme to the HDD for you. 

This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video 

Programming System) and PDC (Programme Delivery 

Control) systems used by many analog TV stations to 

ensure that a timer recording catches the whole 

programme even when the programme is not running to 

schedule. Up to eight timer programmes can be set with 

VPS/PDC on. 

Important 

•A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32 

timer programmes waiting to be recorded. 

• Timer recording will not start if: 

– The recorder is already recording. 

– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized. 

• Timer recording will start when the operation 

preventing timer recording has finished. 

• When the front panel display is set to ON, the timer 

indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display when 

the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means 

that (for a DVD timer recording) there is no disc 

loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (for an 

HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not 

recordable). 

• Approximately two minutes before a timer recording 

is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording 

standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use 

some functions. 

• The maximum length for timer recordings made to 

the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title 

(HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12 

hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there 

will be a break in the recording of a few seconds 

between titles. 

• VPS/PDC works only with analog stations; it does not 

work with digital TV stations. 

• VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in 

your country/area. Check with the stations for 

compatibility. 

• The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the morning are 

used by the GUIDE Plus+ system to download 

programme information. During these times, VPS/ 

PDC may not work reliably; leave VPS/PDC off if you 

set a timer recording for these times. 

• If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programmes that 

are programmed to start at the same time, then the 

programme that actually starts first takes priority. 

Extending a timer recording in progress 

You can extend a timer recording beyond the 

programmed end time. This can be useful if a broadcast 

programme overruns, for example. 

Cancelling or extending the timer 

REC 

1 Press and hold for three seconds during a 

timer recording. 

Recording continues, but the timer indicator disappears 

from the front panel display indicating that the timer has 

been cancelled. 

REC 

2 

Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30 

minute blocks.

Recording 06 

Stopping a timer recording 

STOP REC 

1 

 

Press during a timer recording. 

ENTER 

2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm. 

Preventing use of the recorder before a 

timer recording (child lock) 

You can make all the front panel and remote control 

buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is 

useful when you set a timer recording and want to make 

sure that the timer settings are not changed before 

recording has finished. 

RECORDER 

1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby. 

2 [Front panel] Press and hold for three 

seconds to lock the controls. 

The front panel display briefly shows LOCKED. If any 

buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel, 

LOCKED is briefly displayed again. 

• To unlock the recorder, press and hold (Stop) on 

the front panel (while the recorder is stopped) for 

three seconds until the display shows UNLOCKED. 

the lesser important programme. If one of the 

overlapping programmes is a regular timer 

programme for a digital broadcast, you may choose 

‘Cancel Once’ in order to avoid having it overlap with 

a separately scheduled programme (see Skipping a 

regular timer programme on page 77). 

Simultaneous recording and 

playback (Chase Play) 

Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is still in 

progress from the start, without having to wait until the 

recording has finished (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the 

recording). 

In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording 

in progress. You can watch anything else already on the 

HDD (or on a DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by 

selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using 

the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on 

page 94). 

Chase Play is not possible when DV is the recording input. 

• Press during recording to start playback 

from the beginning of the current recording1 

. 

NAVIGATOR 

• Press during recording to select another 

Timer recording FAQ 

title to play. 

You can use all the usual playback controls, such as 

Frequently Asked Questions 

pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip. 

• Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start • To stop playback, press STOP (recording will 

recording! 

continue). 

Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not • To stop recording, press STOP REC (playback will 

locked (see Lock Disc on page 132), and that there are continue). 

fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD. • During recording or in timer recording standby, you 

• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer programme! can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD 

Why not? 

disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match 

You can’t enter a timer programme if the clock isn’t the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also 

set. 

Additional information about the TV system settings 

• What happens when two or more timer programmes 

on page 146). Also, during simultaneous recording 

overlap? 

and playback, if the TV line system of the playback 

track/title changes then playback will automatically 

Basically, the programme with the earlier recording 

stop. 

start time has priority. However, the recorder will 

start recording the programme with the later start 

time after the earlier programme is finished. 

If schedule to record two programmes have the same 

times (but different channels, for example), then only 

one of the two programmes will be recorded. In this 

event you should cancel the scheduled recording of 

Note 

1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work while copying or backing up. 

HDD 

DISC 

PLAY 

87 

En

06 

88 

En 

Recording 

Recording from an external component 


You can record from an external component, such as a 

camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s 

external inputs. 

1 Make sure that the component you want to 

record from is connected properly to the HDD/DVD 

recorder. 

See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for connection options. 

VIDEO IN 

2 Press repeatedly to select one of the 

external inputs to record from. 

The current input is shown on-screen and in the front 

panel display: 

• AV2/L1 – Input 1 1 

• L2 – Input 2 (front panel) 

• L3 – Input 3 

Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio and 

Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In 

on page 140). 

• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched), 

adjust on the source component or your TV before 

recording. 

• To watch video coming in via the DV input (front 

panel), select DV > DV Video Playback from the 

Home Menu (see also Playing from a DV camcorder on 

page 101). 

REC MODE 

3 Set the recording quality. 

• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on 

page 83 for detailed information. 

HDD/DVD 

4 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. 

REC 

5 Press to start recording. 

• If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard, 

you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on 

video recording on page 80 for more details. 

Playing your recordings on other DVD 

players 

DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW 

Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs 

recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R discs. 

A number of players (including many Pioneer models) 

can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, 

finalized or not. Most players will not play VR mode DVD 

-R discs, although some DVD-ROM drives and DVD 

recorders may be able to (finalization might be 

necessary). Check the manual that came with the player 

to check what kinds of discs it will play. 

When you finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R 

disc, a title menu is created from which you can select 

titles when you play the disc. There are a number of 

different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the 

content of the disc. 

All the title menus are navigated in the usual way, 

pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then 

using the /// followed by ENTER to select titles 

and start playback. 

Finalizing a disc 

DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW 

Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc so that it can 

be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped 

with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. 2 

Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after 

you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you 

want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed 

afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc 

Name on page 132 before starting the steps below. 

DVD+RW discs don’t generally need finalizing. However, 

if you want a title menu to appear when you play the disc, 

then you will need to finalize. When using a DVD+RW, 

you can still record and edit even after finalizing. 

although the title menu will disappear if you do so. 

Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu. 

Important 

• Once you’ve finalized a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or 

DVD+R disc, you can’t edit or record anything else 

on that disc. However, the finalization on a DVD-RW 

disc maybe ‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 133 

for how to do this. 

Note 

1 This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 140). 

2 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional 

information about the TV system settings on page 146 for how to change the recorder’s setting.

Recording 06 

•A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-R DL) disc 

can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even 

after finalizing. 

• DVD-R DL (Video mode) discs and DVD+R DL discs 

must be finalized in order to play in other recorders/ 

players. Note however that some recorders/players 

will not play even finalized dual-layer discs. 

1 Load the disc you want to finalize. 

Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding. 

2 HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu. 

ENTER 

3 Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ > ‘Next Screen’. 

Disc Setup 

Basic 

Initialize 

Finalize 

Optimize HDD 

ENTER 

4 For DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and 

DVD+R/+RW discs only, select a title menu style, 

then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to 

cancel. 

The menu you select will be the one that appears when 

the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for a DVD+R/+RW) is selected 

on any DVD player. 

Finalize 

Finalize 

Undo Finalize 

Next Screen 

Start 

• Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR- 

7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These 

discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on 

this recorder. 

5 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc. 

During finalization: 

• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW or DVD+R/ 

+RW disc is going to take more than around four 

minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around 

four minutes before completion, the option to cancel 

disappears. 

• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R 

disc. 

• How long finalization takes depends on the type of 

disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the 

number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR 

mode can take up to one hour to finalize. DVD-R/-RW 

(Video mode) and DVD+R/+RW discs can take up to 

20 minutes. 

Initializing recordable DVD discs 

DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM 

DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either Video mode 

recording or VR mode recording. 1 

When you first load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, 

the recorder initializes it for recording automatically. By 

default, blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode 

recording. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 90 if you 

want to change the default to Video mode. 

DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of 

the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode 

recording, you must initialize it before recording anything 

on the disc. 

DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized in 

order to erase the contents of the disc. 

Important 

• Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc 

will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there 

is nothing on the disc that you want to keep! 

• You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in 

a different format if it was originally initialized on an 

older DVD recorder. 

• Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can’t reinitialize 

a DVD-R back to Video mode. 

Note 

1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording. 

89 

En

06 

90 

En 

Recording 


ENTER 

2 Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video Mode’, ‘VR 

Mode’ or ‘Initialize DVD+RW’. 

Disc Setup 

Basic 

Initialize 

Finalize 

Optimize HDD 

ENTER 

VR Mode 

Video Mode 

Initialize DVD+RW 

Start 

Start 

Start 

3 Select ‘Start’. 

It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc (except 

DVD-RAM discs, which can take up to an hour). 

Initializing Disc 

1 min left 

Pr 1 

DVD-RW Auto Initialize 

DVD-RW 

• Default setting: VR Mode 

Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you 

insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired 

initialization mode before inserting a disc. 


ENTER 

2 Select ‘Basic’>’DVD-RW Auto Init.’, then 

‘VR Mode’ or ‘Video Mode’. 

Disc Setup 

Basic Input Disc Name 

VR Mode 

Initialize 

Lock Disc 

Video Mode 

Finalize 

Optimize HDD 

DVD-RW Auto Init.

Playback 07 

Chapter 7 

Playback 

Introduction 

Most of the features described in this chapter make use 

of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the cursor 

buttons and ENTER. To go back one level from any 

screen, use the RETURN/EXIT button. 

Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of 

every screen shows which buttons do what. 

Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the 

HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/ 

DivX discs and CDs, although the exact operation of 

some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. 

• Many functions are not available when a Video CD is 

playing in PBC mode. Start playback from the Disc 

Navigator screen for non-PBC playback (see Using the 

Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 95). 

• For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The 

PhotoViewer on page 125. 

Basic playback 

A L L 

This section shows you how to use your recorder for 

playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of 

video from the HDD. 

Important 

• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means any 

kind of playable or recordable DVD. If a function is 

specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified. 

• Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and DVD+RW discs don’t 

allow certain playback controls to operate at certain 

points in the disc. This is not a malfunction. 

HDD/DVD 

1 Select the HDD or DVD for playback. 

• If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3 below. 

• Select DVD for any kind of disc playback. 

OPEN/CLOSE 

2 [Front panel] Load a disc. 

Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc 

tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a doublesided 

DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to 

play face down). 

• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read 

the note on page 93. 

 

3 Start playback. 

• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc 

menu may appear when you start playback. Use the 

/// buttons, number buttons, and ENTER to 

navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons 

and ENTER for Video CD menus. 

• When playing video from the HDD, playback will 

automatically stop after the end of a title is reached. 

• There may be a slight pause when playback switches 

from the first to the second layer of a dual-layer disc. 

• See the following sections for more details on playing 

specific kinds of discs. 

STOP 

PLAY 

4 Press to stop playback. 

5 When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject 

the disc and switch the recorder back into standby. 

Playing DVD discs 

The table below shows the basic playback controls for 

DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs. 

PLAY 

 

STOP 

 

PAUSE 

 

PREV NEXT 

 


If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback 

starts from the place last stopped. 



point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP 

again to cancel the resume function.) 


when paused. 



Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title. 

(During playback you can also use the 

front panel CH +/– buttons.) 

DVD+R/DVD+RW only: 

PREV may not always skip to the previous 

title. 

91 

En

07 

92 

En 

Playback 

SETUP /TUNE+ SR+ 

1 2 3 

/ST– ENTER /ST+ 

4 5 6 


7 8 9 


0 

CLEAR 

/ 

TOP MENU 

DISC 

NAVIGATOR 

ENTER 

ENTER 

CM BACK 

CM SKIP 

/ 

MENU 

RETURN / EXIT 

Except VR mode: During playback, enter a 

chapter number then press ENTER to skip 

directly to that chapter within the currently 

playing title. 

On some discs, you can also use the number 

buttons to select numbered items in 

the disc menu. 

VR mode only: During playback, enter a 

title number then press ENTER. 

All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry 

and start again. 

(Commercial back/skip) 

Turn the Smart Jog counter-clockwise for 

backward skip; turn clockwise for forward 

skip. You can search up to two hours in 


While paused, press and hold to start 

slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to 

change the playback speed. 

While paused, press to advance a single 

frame in either direction. You can also execute 

frame-by-frame playback/backward 

scanning via the Smart Jog. 

Press to display the menu of a DVD-Video 

disc. (DVD+R/+RW discs finalized on this 

recorder will display the Disc Navigator. 

Press MENU to display the disc menu.) 

Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD- 

Video disc menus; press ENTER to select 

items. 

Press to return to the previous level of a 

DVD-Video disc menu. 

Playing from the HDD 

The table below shows the basic playback controls when 

playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD). 

PLAY 

 

STOP 

 

PAUSE 

 

PREV NEXT 

 


1 2 3 


4 5 6 


7 8 9 


0 

CLEAR 

/ 

ENTER 

CM BACK 

CM SKIP 

/ 




Playback automatically stops after the end 

of a title is reached. 






when paused. 



Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title. 

(During playback you can also use the 

front panel CH +/– buttons.) 

During playback, enter a title number then 

press ENTER to skip directly to that title. 

Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and 

start again. 








change the playback speed. 


frame in either direction. You can also execute 

frame-by-frame playback/backward 

scanning via the Smart Jog.

Playback 07 

Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs 


audio CDs 1 , and WMA/MP3 files. 

PLAY 

 

STOP 

 

PAUSE 

 

PREV NEXT 

 


1 2 3 


4 5 6 


7 8 9 


0 

CLEAR 

ENTER 




when paused. 

Except WMA: Press to start scanning. 

Press again to increase the scanning 

speed. (There are two scan speeds; the 

current scan speed is shown on-screen.) 

Press to skip to previous/next track (or 

folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (During 

playback you can also use the front panel 

CH +/– buttons.) 

During playback, enter a track number 

then press ENTER to skip directly to that 

track. 


start again. 

Playing Video CD/Super VCDs 


Video CD/Super VCDs. 

Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short) 

menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you 

load them and display a menu on-screen from where you 

can select what to watch. 2 

PLAY 

 

STOP 

 


Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed onscreen, 

playback starts from the place last 

stopped. 


Video CD only: You can resume playback 

from the same point by pressing PLAY. 

(Press STOP again to cancel the 

resume function.) 

PAUSE 

 

PREV NEXT 

 


1 2 3 


4 5 6 


7 8 9 


0 

CLEAR 


when paused. 



Press to skip to previous/next track. 

When a PBC menu is displayed, press to 

display the previous/next page. (During 



During playback, enter a track number 

then press ENTER to skip directly to that 

track. 


start again. 

While a PBC menu screen is displayed, 

use to select numbered menu items. 

Video CD in non-PBC mode only: 








change the playback speed (forward only). 


frame (forward only). You can also execute 

frame-by-frame playback via the 

Smart Jog. 

Press to display the disc menu of a Video 

CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode. 

Note 

1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise 

will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels 

on page 99). 

2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and programme play are not available. You can play a PBC Video 

CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on 

page 95). 

ENTER 

CM BACK 

CM SKIP 

/ 

RETURN / EXIT 

93 

En

07 

94 

En 

Playback 

Playing DivX video files 


DivX video files. 

PLAY 

 

STOP 

 

PAUSE 

 

PREV NEXT 

 

/ 

AUDIO 

+ 

MAIN SUB 

MAIN 

SUB 

SUBTITLE 

+ 




Playback of titles (DivX files) proceeds in 

alphabetical order. 






when paused. 



Press to skip to previous/next title. (During 



While paused, press to advance one 

frame. Press and hold to start slow motion 

playback (press repeatedly to change the 

slow motion play speed). You can also 

execute frame-by-frame playback via the 

Smart Jog. 

Press to display the playback audio type; 

press repeatedly to change the playback 

audio type. 

Press to display subtitle information; press 

repeatedly to change subtitles. 

Using the Disc Navigator to browse 

the contents of a disc 

Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc 

and start playback. 

Using the Disc Navigator with recordable 

discs and the HDD 

DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD 

You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video 

on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view 

information on titles. 

See also Editing on page 104 for more on editing 

recordable discs. 

HDD/DVD 

1 Select the HDD or DVD. 

DISC 

2 NAVIGATOR Open the Disc Navigator. 

Disc Navigator (HDD) 

4 Titles 

Recent first 

All Genres 

HDD 

SP 

Remain 

30h30m 

101 

9 

8 

7 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 

11/29Mon 23:00 Fri 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 2ch SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

• You can also access the Disc Navigator from the 

Home Menu. 

3 Browse the list of titles. 

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles. 

• Use the PREV/ NEXT buttons to display the 

previous/next page of titles. 

• To change the thumbnail picture displayed for a title 

see Set Thumbnail on page 108. 

• For HDD recordings, you should be able to see a 

thumbnail title digest. If it doesn’t display, set Set 

Preview to Normal. See Set Preview on page 145. 

ENTER 

4 Play the highlighted title. 

• You can also select Play from the command menu 

options. 

MENU

Playback 07 

Changing the display style of the Disc 

Navigator 

You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in 

various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by 

recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose 

whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the 

same time. 

1 Display the View Options panel. 

The View Options panel 


1 

Style 

4 Titles 

4 Titles 

Sort order 2 

Recent first 

NEW first 

Genre 

3 

All Genres 

All Genres 

7 

HDD 

SP 

Remain 

30h30m 

ENTER 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 

11/29Mon 23:00 Fri 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 2ch SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

2 Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or ‘Genre’, 

then press ENTER to see the available view options. 

• Style – Select four or eight titles per screen view 

• Sort order – Sort by date (most recent first), 

unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest 

first) 

• Genre – Display all genres or just a selected genre 

ENTER 

3 Choose a view option, then press ENTER. 

The title list display is updated according to the new 

display preferences. 

Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only 

discs 

DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 DivX 

1 HOME MENU Display the Home Menu. 

ENTER 

MENU 

Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/ 

MP3/DivX disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which 

takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 

3 Select what you want to play. 

Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc 

Navigator looks slightly different, but they are all navigated 

in the same way. 

The screen below shows a WMA/MP3/DivX disc. 

Navigate to the folder, or the track/title within a folder 

that you want to play. 

Playback starts after you press ENTER. 

• For discs that contain CD-Audio tracks and WMA/ 

MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you can switch the 

playback area between CD, WMA/MP3 and DivX. 

This can only be done while the disc is stopped. 

Scanning discs 

(except WMA) 

You can scan discs at various speeds, forwards or 

backwards. 1 

A L L 

1 During playback, start reverse or forward 

scanning. 

• The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 

2 Press repeatedly to change the scanning 

speed. 

There are four scanning speeds available when playing 

HDD video, a DVD or a DivX title. Reverse playback is also 

possible with HDD and DVD video. 2 

There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc. 

3 

Resume normal playback. 

2 Select ‘Disc Navigator’. 

Note 

1• No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles. 

• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, DVDs and DivX, except on forward SCAN 1. 

• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. 

2 Reverse playback may not be smooth. 

ENTER 

Disc Navigator 

CD 

WMA/MP3 

Divx 

PLAY 

Folder (01-03) 

01.Rock 

02.Pop 

03.Dance 

Track(001-004) 

001.Intro 

002.Escape 

003.Everything You Say 

004.What I Do 

95 

En

07 

96 

En 

Playback 

Playing in slow motion 

DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX 

You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs 

and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in 

either direction, while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX 

titles can only be played forwards in slow motion. 

There is no sound when playing in slow motion. 

PAUSE 

1 Pause playback. 

/ 

/ 

2 Press and hold to start slow motion 

reverse or forward play. 

/ 

/ 

3 Press repeatedly to change the slow 

motion speed. 

The current playback speed is indicated on-screen. 

PLAY 

4 Resume normal playback. 

Frame advance/frame reverse 

DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX 

You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc 1 or the 

HDD frame-by-frame. 

With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles, you can only 

use frame advance. 

PAUSE 

1 Pause playback. 

/ 

/ 

2 Back up or advance one frame with each 

press. 

• You can also do this by rotating the Smart Jog. 

PLAY 

3 Resume normal playback. 

The Play Mode menu 

The Play Mode menu gives you access to search 

functions, repeat and programme play functions. 

• HOME MENU Select ‘Play Mode’ from the Home Menu. 

Search Mode 

The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a 

specified point in a disc by time 2 or by title/chapter/ 

folder/track number. 

1 Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play 

Mode menu, then choose a search option. 

The available search options depend on the type of disc. 

2 

ADVANCED 

0 Enter a title/chapter/folder/track number 

or a search time. 

Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes 

into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15 

minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0. 

Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and 

30 seconds into the current track, press 2, 3, 0. 

Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6, 

press 6. 

ENTER 

3 Start playback. 

Note 

1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. 

2 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input. 

A L L 

A L L 

Play Mode 

Search Mode 

A-B Repeat 

Repeat 

Programme 

ENTER 

SETUP /TUNE+ 

1 2 

SR+ 

3 

/ST– /ST+ 

4 

ENTER 

5 6 


7 8 9 

Play Mode 

Search Mode 

A-B Repeat 

Repeat 

Programme 

Time Search 

Title Search 

Chapter Search 

Time Search 

Title Search 

Chapter Search 

Input Time 

0.01.00

Playback 07 

A-B Repeat 

DVD HDD CD Video CD DivX 

The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points 

(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is 

played over and over. 1 

ENTER 

1 During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ 

from the Play Mode menu. 

ENTER 

2 With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press at 

the point you want the loop to start. 

Play Mode 

Search Mode 

A-B Repeat 

Repeat 

Programme 

A (Loop Start) 

B (Loop End) 

Off 

ENTER 3 With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press at the 

point you want the loop to end. 

Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and 

plays the loop round and round. 

• When playing a DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), 

DVD+R/+RW, or from the HDD, the start and end 

points of the loop must be in the same title. 

• To resume normal playback, select Off from the A-B 

Repeat menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such 

as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. 

Repeat play 

There are various repeat play options, depending on the 

kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for 

playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together 

with programme play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the 

programme list (see Programme play below). 2 

• Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode 

menu, then choose a repeat play mode. 

• To resume normal playback, select Repeat Off from 

the Repeat Play menu, or press CLEAR if no menu 

OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. 

Programme play 

This feature lets you program the play order of titles/ 

chapters 3 /folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD. 

1 Select ‘Programme’ from the Play Mode 

menu, then ‘Input/Edit Programme’. 

The Input/Edit Programme screen varies according to the 

disc type. Below is the DVD input screen. 

Note 

1 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is cancelled. 

2 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is cancelled. 

3 When playing a programme list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the programme list may be sometimes be played, depending 

on the disc. 

A L L 

ENTER 

Play Mode 

Search Mode 

A-B Repeat 

Repeat 

Programme 

Repeat Title 

Repeat Chapter 

Repeat Off 

HDD DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 

ENTER 

Programme 

Step 

01.001 

02. 

03. 

04. 

05. 

06. 

07. 

08. 

Title (01-03) 

Title 01 

Title 02 

Title 03 

Chapter(001-015) 

Chapter 001 

Chapter 002 

Chapter 003 

Chapter 004 

Chapter 005 

Chapter 006 

Chapter 007 

Chapter 008 

97 

En

07 

98 

En 

Playback 

ENTER 

2 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for 

the current step in the programme list. 

After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/ 

track, the step number automatically moves down one. 

• To insert a step into the programme list, highlight the 

step number where you want to insert another step, 

then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After 

pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move 

down one. 

• To delete a step from the programme list, highlight 

the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR. 

3 Repeat step 2 to build up a programme list. 

A programme list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/ 

folders/tracks. 

PLAY 

 

4 Play the programme list. 

Programme play remains active until you cancel 

programme play, erase the programme list, eject the disc 

or switch off the recorder. 

Tip 

• To save your programme list and exit the programme 

edit screen without starting playback, press 

HOME MENU. 

• During programme play, press NEXT to skip to 

the next programme step. 

• To repeat play the programme list, select 

Programme Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode 

menu (see Repeat play on page 97). 

• Press CLEAR during playback to switch off 

programme play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc 

Navigator, is displayed). Press while stopped to erase 

the programme list. 

• From the programme menu you can also: 

Start Programme Play – Starts playback of a saved 

programme list 

Cancel Programme Play – Turns off programme 

play, but does not erase the programme list 

Erase Programme List – Erases the programme list 

and turns off programme play 

Displaying and switching subtitles 

DVD-Video DivX 

Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in one or more 

languages; the disc box will usually tell you which 

subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle 

language during playback. 1 

Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle 

options. 

SUBTITLE 

+ 

• MAIN SUB Select/change the subtitle language. 

The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in 

the front panel display. 

• To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR. 

Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks 

DVD-Video DivX 

When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two 

or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you 

can switch the soundtrack during playback. 2 

Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack 

options. 

AUDIO 

+ 

• MAIN SUB Change the audio soundtrack. 

The current audio language is shown on-screen and in 

the front panel display. 

• The sound may drop out for a few seconds when 

switching soundtracks. 

• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS 

soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when 

DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack, 

connect this recorder to receiver subwoofer via the 

digital output. See Basic connections on page 10 for 

connection details. 

Note 

1• Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access. 

• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 141. 

2• Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access. 

• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 141.

Playback 07 

Switching audio channels 

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 

For HDD 1 and VR mode content recorded with bilingual 

audio, you can switch between left (L) channel, right (R) 

channel, or both (L+R). 2 

When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch 

between stereo, just the left channel or just the right 

channel. 

Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these 

discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as 

well as individual channels in each. 

AUDIO 

+ 

• MAIN SUB Press repeatedly to display/switch the 

audio channel. 

The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated onscreen. 

HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM 

L+R – Both channels (default) 

L – Left channel only 

R – Right channel only 

CD Video CD WMA/MP3 

Stereo – Stereo (default) 

1/L – Left channel only 

2/R – Right channel only 

Super VCD 

1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1/Stereo (default) 

1 L – Soundtrack 1/Left channel 

1 R – Soundtrack 1/Right channel 

2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2/Stereo 

2 L – Soundtrack 2/Left channel 

2 R – Soundtrack 2/Right channel 

Switching camera angles 

DVD-Video 

Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or 

more angles — check the disc box for details: it should 

be marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle 

scenes. When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same 

icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles 

are available (this can be switched off if you prefer — see 

Angle Indicator on page 143). 

• MAIN SUB Switch the camera angle. 

• The angle number is displayed on-screen. 

• If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the 

new angle. 

Displaying disc information on-screen 

You can display various on-screen information about the 

disc loaded or the HDD. 

DISPLAY 

• Display/change the on-screen information. 

• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc 

(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the 

status of just the currently selected playback/ 

recording device (HDD or removable disc). 

• To hide the information display, press DISPLAY 

repeatedly until it disappears. 

HDD and removable disc activity display 

Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc 

(DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD/DVD button to switch 

between the two kinds of display. 

Note 

1 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 143). 

2• When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot 

switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 141) or listen via the analog outputs 

if you need to switch the audio channel. 

• When playing a Dolby Digital source, you can also switch channels from the Dual Mono menu of the receiver subwoofer — see Dual mono 

setting on page 32. 

ANGLE 

+ 

99 

En

07 

100 

En 

Playback 

The example displays below show high-speed copying 

from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback. 

HDD 

Remain 10h35m 

Stop 

HDD 

Remain 10h35m 

Chase Play 

Rec 

Stop 

DVD-RW VR 

Original 

Disc Name : Comedy shows 

Play 

DVD-R Video 

Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) 

Hi-Speed Copy 

HDD DVD 

0h08m left 

Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) 

Recording time 

Relative playback position 

Shows recording restrictions for 

the current channel programme 

DVD-RW Video 

Remain –h––m 

Stop 

DVD-RW Video 

Remain 0h52m 

Stop 

Resume 

ABC Pr 1 

Stereo 

XP (1h00m/DVD) 

Finalized 

Rem. 0h35m Copy Once 

Title Name : 21/11 Football match 

Indicates copy-protected material 

Indicates a multi-angle scene 

DVD Mode 

3–2 0. 00. 15 ! 

Chapter Time 0. 00. 21 

Chapter Total 0h01m52s 

4.32Mbps 

Indicates the data transfer rate 

Tip 

• See Switching camera angles on page 99 for more on 

multi-angle scene switching. 

• When using the simultaneous play and record 

feature, the display shows information for playback 

only. 

• During real-time copy, the copy source playback 

information is displayed. 

• The Video mode DVD-R/-RW displays become the 

same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized. 

• The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis 

is calculated based on a 12 cm/4.7 GB disc at the 

displayed record setting. 

• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are 

approximately 0.1 % shorter than the actual time. 

This is because of the slightly different frame rates of 

TV broadcasts versus DVD. 

• The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time 

display when the disc is paused. 

• Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear 

in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that 

the broadcast TV programme contains copy control 

information.

Playing and recording from a DV camcorder 08 

Chapter 8 

Playing and recording from a DV 

camcorder 

You can play back and record video from a DV camcorder 

connected to the DV IN jack on the front panel of this 

recorder. 

Important 

• If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable, 

you cannot control the second unit from this one. 

• You can’t control this recorder remotely from a 

component connected to the DV IN jack. 

Playing from a DV camcorder 

1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to 

the front panel DV IN jack. 

2 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV 

audio input is setup as you would like. 

See DV Input on page 140 for more on this. 

• Check also that the Audio In settings for External 

Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want 

them (see Audio In on page 140). 

3 HOME MENU Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video Playback’ 

from the Home Menu. 

4 Start playback on the camcorder. 

Images from the camcorder should appear on your TV. 

• To record the incoming video, press HDD/DVD to 

select the HDD or a DVD for recording, then press 

REC. Press STOP REC to finish recording. 

If there is no signal from the device connected to the 

DV jack, or the signal is copy-protected, recording 

will pause. It will automatically restart once there is a 

recordable signal. 

• The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN 

jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will pause if 

the signal is interrupted during recording. 

• If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard, 

you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on 

video recording on page 80 for more details. 

Recording from a DV camcorder 

• The source signal must be DVC-SD format. 

• You can’t record date and time information from DV 

cassette. 

• During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or 

has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will 

pause recording. Recording will restart automatically 

when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is 

more than two minutes of blank tape, this recorder 

will stop recording and the camcorder should stop 

(depending on the camcorder). 

Copying from a DV source 

Using the recorder’s remote, you can control both the 

camcorder and this recorder. 

Important 

• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this 

recorder’s remote. 

• For best results when recording from a DV camcorder 

to this recorder, we recommend cueing the 

camcorder to the place you want to start recording 

from and setting the camcorder to play-pause. 



Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. 

REC MODE 





audio input is setup as you would like. 





4 HOME MENU 

Select ‘DV’, then ‘Copy from a DV 

Source’ from the Home Menu. 

• DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is 

in VTR mode with a tape loaded. 

101 

En

08 

102 

En 

Playing and recording from a DV camcorder 

ENTER 

5 Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or 

‘Record to DVD’. 

6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you 

want to start recording from. 

For best results, pause playback at the point from which 

you want to record. 

• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this 

recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the 

, , , , , and buttons. 

ENTER 

7 Select ‘Start Rec’. 

Stop 

1.02.22 

Stop 

Control with these 

buttons 

 

Start Rec 

Pause Rec 

 

Stop Rec 

HDD 

Rem. 

SP (2h00m/DVD) 

32h45m 

• You can pause or stop the recording by selecting 

Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display. 

You cannot control the camcorder from this remote 

control during recording. 

• If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder, 

the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be 

recorded. Use the pause button on your camcorder 

instead and recording will start immediately. 

• HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only: A chapter 

marker is inserted every time there is a break in the 

timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the 

recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for 

example. 

• If you don’t want to see the DV recording screen 

during recording, press DISPLAY to hide it (press 

again to display). 

• While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording 

screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN/EXIT 

button. 

DV Auto Copy 

DV Auto Copy allows you to make an exact copy of the 

contents of a DV source to the HDD or a DVD. 



Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. 

REC MODE 





audio input is setup as you require. 





4 HOME MENU Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Auto Copy’ from 

the Home Menu. 

• DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is 

in VTR mode with a tape loaded. 

ENTER 

5 Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or 

‘Record to DVD’. 

The DV tape is rewound to the beginning. Once it is 

rewound, the DV tape is played from the beginning and 

copied to either the HDD or a DVD. 

• If there is a gap of two minutes or more between 

recorded contents, the copying process is 

automatically stopped. 

• Once copying is finished, the DV tape is automatically 

rewound. 

• To cancel the copying process, press STOP REC for 

more than three seconds.

Playing and recording from a DV camcorder 08 

About automatic finalization 

If you use a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW 

disc for copying, it will automatically be finalized after 

copying is complete. 

• You can’t customize the background for DVD-R/-RW 

or DVD+R/+RW disc finalization. 

• No title names are assigned. 

• If you want to give the disc a name, please do so 

before you start the copy (see Input Disc Name on 

page 132). 

• If a timer recording is scheduled to start, and in some 

other instances, the disc will not be finalized. 

Frequently Asked Questions 

•I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder! 

Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also 

make sure that what you’re trying to record is not 

copy-protected. 

If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder 

then switch back on. 

• There’s a picture, but no sound! 

Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on 

page 140) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2. 1 

About DV 

Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394-1995, you 

can connect a DV camcorder to this recorder using a DV 

cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals. 

“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks. 

• This recorder is only compatible with DV-format 

(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and 

Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible. 

• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at 

a time to this recorder. 

• You cannot control this recorder from external 

equipment connected via the DV IN jack. 

• It may not always be possible to control the 

connected camcorder via the DV IN jack. 

• DV camcorders can usually record audio as stereo 

16-bit/48 kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/32 kHz. 

This recorder can only record one stereo audio track. 

Set the DV Input setting as required (see DV Input on 

page 140). 

• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 kHz or 48 

kHz (not 44.1 kHz). 

• Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the 

source component pauses playback or plays an 

unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the 

source component, or the DV cable is disconnected. 

• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output 

functionality. 

Note 

1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually 

from the External Audio setting (page 140). 

103 

En

09 

104 

En 

Editing 

Chapter 9 

Editing 

Editing options 

The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types. 

*1 DVD-R/-RW only 

HDD 

DVD-R/-RW 

(Video mode), 

DVD+R/+RW 

DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM 

(VR mode) 

Original Play List 

Create (page 106) 

Play (page 106) 

Erase (page 106) 

Edit > Title Name (page 107) 

Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 108) 

Edit > Erase Section (page 108) 

Edit > Divide (page 109) 

Edit > Chapter Edit (page 109) 

Edit > Set Genre (page 110) 

Edit > Lock (page 111) 

Edit > Move (page 111) 

Edit > Combine (page 112) 

Genre Name (page 112) 

Multi-Mode (page 113) 

Undo (page 113) *1 *1

Editing 09 

The Disc Navigator screen 

The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video 

content on unfinalized Video mode and DVD-R/-RW (VR 

mode) discs, DVD+R/+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as 

video content on the hard disk drive. 

Important 

• Titles that have been recorded with a Input Line 

System setting different to the current setting of the 

recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank 

thumbnail image. See also Additional information 

about the TV system settings on page 146. 

• During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator 

for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a 

mark. These titles were recorded with a Input Line 

System setting different to the current setting of the 

recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be 

played. 

HDD/DVD 

1 Select the HDD or DVD. 

DISC 

NAVIGATOR 2 Display the Disc Navigator screen. 

Playback will automatically stop when you do this. 

• The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home 

Menu. 

Available 

recording time 

View options panel 

Title list 


10Titles 

101 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 

11/29Mon 23:00 Fri 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 2ch SP SP 

4 Titles 

2h00m(1.0G) 

9 

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

Recent first 

2h00m(1.0G) MENU 

8 

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

All Genres 

1h00m(1.0G) 

HDD 

SP 

7 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

Remain 

30h30m 

1h00m(1.0G) 

Title thumbnail Title information Command 

menu panel 

Selected 

title 

• Press to display the command menu panel. 

Use the / and ENTER buttons to navigate the 

menus. 

PREV NEXT 

• When in the title list, press to display the 

previous/next page if there are more titles than can 

be displayed. 

DISPLAY 

• Press to change the title information displayed 

in the title list. 

HDD/DVD 

• Press to switch between the HDD and DVD 

Disc Navigator screens. 

• If you are editing a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD 

-RAM disc you can display the Play List by selecting 

Play List from the view options panel (press , then 

select Play List from the view options, then Play List). 

Disc Navigator (DVD) 

4 Titles 

4 Titles 

Original Original 

HDD 

SP 

Remain 

0h30m 

101 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM 


2h00m(1.0G) 

20:00 FRI 3/12 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

1h00m(1.0G) 

1h00m(1.0G) 

• Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are 

recently recorded titles that haven’t yet been played. 

DISC 

Style 

PlayList 

9 

8 

7 

3 NAVIGATOR 

Press to exit the Disc Navigator. 

Editing accuracy 

Some editing commands ask you whether you want to 

keep Video mode compatibility or frame accuracy (Video 

Mode Compatible Editing or Frame Accurate Editing). 

Frame Accurate Editing is very precise. The edit point is 

accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this 

accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use 

the high-speed copy function to make a DVD-R/-RW 

(Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW. 

Video Mode Compatible Editing is less precise. The edit 

point you choose will only be accurate to within one-half 

to one second. On the other hand, these edit points will 

be preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a DVD 

-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW. 

HDD genres 

The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be 

many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize 

your HDD video content you can assign different genres 

to titles. There are 20 genres in total, including five userdefinable 

ones that you can name as you like. 

MENU 

105 

En

09 

106 

En 

Editing 

Create 

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only 

Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it. 

Before you can use this command, make sure that the 

Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the 

left. 

1 Select ‘Create’ from the command menu 

panel. 

2 Select an original title to add to the Play 

List. 


Repeat these two steps to add as many titles as 

necessary to the Play List. 

Play 

ENTER 


4 Titles 

Play List 

DVD 

VR Mode 

Remain 

0h30m 

ENTER 

No title 

0Titles 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Erase 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Create 

1h00m(1.0G) 

Undo 

DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD 

Use this function to start playback of a title. 

1 Highlight the title you want to play. 


Play 

Edit 

2 Select ‘Play’ from the command menu 

panel. 

Playback of the title you selected starts. 

Erase 

Use this function to erase unwanted titles. 

When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles 

from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space 

increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a DVD-RW 

(Video mode) or DVD+RW disc increases the available 

recording time only if it is the last title on the disc. 1 

Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R (VR mode 

or Video mode) or DVD+R, will not result in any more free 

space on the disc. 

1 Highlight the title you want to erase. 


2 Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu 

panel. 

3 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. 

Tip 

• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when 

the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing 

ENTER. 

Note 

1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers. 

ENTER 


4 Titles 

Recent first 

All Genres 

HDD 

SP 

Remain 

30h30m 

101 

9 

8 

7 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 

11/29Mon 23:00 Fri 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 2ch SP 

Play 

SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Erase 

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPEdit 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Genre Name 

1h00m(1.0G) 

Multi-Mode 

1h00m(1.0G) 


ENTER 

ENTER

Editing 09 

Title Name 


You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long 

for VR mode, DVD-RAM and HDD recordings, and up to 

40 characters for Video mode recordings and DVD+R/ 

+RW discs. 

1 Highlight the title you want to name (or 

rename). 


ENTER 

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from the 



101 

4 Titles 

Recent first 

All Genres 

HDD 

SP 

Remain 

30h30m 

ENTER 

9 

8 

7 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 

11/29Mon 23:00 Fri 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 2ch SP 

Play 

Title Name SP 

Set 2h00m(1.0G) 

Erase 

Thumbnail 

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

Erase Edit Section 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

Divide 

Chapter Edit 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Set 

Multi-Mode 

Genre 

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Lock SPGenre 

Name 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

Cancel 1h00m(1.0G) 

Cancel 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

3 Input a name for the selected title. 

Input Title Name 

CAPS 

small 

A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! 

N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; 

A A A A A A Æ ç E E E E I I I I # 

D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y ß $ % 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & 

£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ® 

2 3 1 ´ µ · ¿ ` 

OK Clear Space 

_ + – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | } 

˚ 

~

09 

108 

En 

Editing 

Set Thumbnail 

HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM 

You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in 

the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in 

that title. 

1 Highlight the title you want to change 

the thumbnail picture for. 


ENTER 

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the 


The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you 

can find the frame you want. 


4 Titles 

Recent first 

All Genres 

HDD 

SP 

Remain 

30h30m 

101 

9 

8 

7 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 

Play 

11/29Mon 23:00 Fri 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 2ch SPTitle 

SP Name 

Set 2h00m(1.0G) 

Erase 

Thumbnail 


20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

Divide 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

Chapter Edit 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Set 

Multi-Mode 

Genre 


Name 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 


Cancel 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

3 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to 

find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set. 

Set Thumbnail (HDD) 

OK 

OK 

Exit 

Exit 

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP 

Rec. time 2h00m 

10-1 00.00.09.15 

Play Pause 

You can also use the chapter and time search features 

(press the YELLOW button), and the Smart Jog (for 

CM SKIP and CM BACK). 

4 Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit screen. 

Erase Section 

HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM 

Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal 

for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording 

made from the TV. 

1 Highlight the title containing the section 

you want to erase. 


ENTER 

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the 


ENTER 

3 HDD only: Select the type of edit. 

! 

HDD/DVD RECORDER 

Please select the type of editing. 

Video Mode Compatible Editing is 

recommended for compatibility with 

high-speed copying. 

Video Mode Compatible Editing 

Frame Accurate Editing 

• For more information about these options, see 

Editing accuracy on page 105. 

4 Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls 

(, , , , etc.) to find the start of the section 

to erase, then press ENTER. 

The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current 

play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker 

shows the start of the section. 

Erase Section (HDD) 

From 

To 

Exit 

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP 


10-1 00.00.09.15 

Play Pause

Editing 09 

5 Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, 

find the end of the section to erase, then press 

ENTER. 

After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end 

of the section, with the section itself marked in red. 

6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel. 

In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of 

video either side of the marked section to see how the 

edit will look. 

• When editing VR mode Original content, you may not 

be able to erase very short sections (less than five 

seconds). 

Divide 

ENTER 

ENTER 

HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only 

Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that 

once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be 

recombined into one again. 

1 Highlight the title you want to divide. 


ENTER 

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the 



! 










4 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to 

find the place you want to divide the title. 

Divide Title (HDD) 

Divide 

Cancel 

ENTER 5 Press to divide the title at the current 

playback position. 

ENTER 


Chapter Edit 

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD 

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP 


10–1 00.00.09.15 

Play Pause 

When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you 

can edit individual chapters within a title, with 

commands for erasing, combining and dividing. 

1 Highlight the title that contains the chapters you 

want to edit. 


ENTER 

Divided titles cannot 

be combined. 

OK? 

Yes No 

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the 


ENTER 

! 


! 










109 

En

09 

110 

En 

Editing 

4 Select the command you want: 

• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use 

the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find the 

point at which you want to divide the chapter, then 

press ENTER. 

Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) 

1–1 0.00.00 

Play 

Exit 

Divide 

Erase/Move 

Combine 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 


Chapters 5 

You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as 

you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM 

disc or 99 chapters per HDD title). 

• Erase 1 /Move 2 – Erase or move chapters: Select the 

chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER. 

Select whether you want to erase or move the 

chapter. 

Move command only: Select the destination for the 

chapter, and press ENTER. 

001 


Exit 

Divide 

Erase/Move 

Combine 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

Erase 

Rec. time 1h00m Move 

Chapter 0h01m 

Cancel 

002 003 004 

005 

• Combine 3 – Combine two adjacent chapters into 

one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent 

chapters and press ENTER. 


1 

Exit 

Divide 

Erase/Move 

Combine 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 


2 3 4 

5 

5 Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc 

Navigator screen. 

Set Genre 

HDD 

Use this command to assign a genre to a title. 

1 Highlight the title you want to assign a 

genre to. 


2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from the 


3 Select a genre for the title. 

Note 

1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long. 

2 VR mode Play List only. 

3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle 

chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one. 

ENTER 

ENTER 


101 

4 Titles 

Recent first 

All Genres 

HDD 

SP 

Remain 

30h30m 

ENTER 

9 

8 

7 


4 Titles 

Recent first 

All Genres 

HDD 

SP 

Remain 

30h30m 

101 

9 

8 

7 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 

Play 

11/29Mon 23:00 Fri 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 2ch SP Title SP Name 

Set 2h00m(1.0G) 

Erase 

Thumbnail 


20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

Divide 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

Chapter Edit 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Set 

Multi-Mode 

Genre 


Name 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 


Cancel 

1h00m(1.0G) 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 

Play 

11/29Mon 23:00 Fri 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 2ch SP Title SP name 

No 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Erase Category 

Set Thumbnail 

Movies 


20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPDrama 

Edit Chapter 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SPEntertainmt. 

Divide 

2h00m(1.0G) 

News 

Set 

Multi-Mode 

Genre 

Sport 


Name 

Comedy 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 


Cancel 

1h00m(1.0G)

Editing 09 

Lock 

HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM 

Original only 

You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased 

accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock 

it later. 

Important 

• You can’t undo any edits made before changing the 

lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock 

command using the Undo option from the Disc 

Navigator menu. 

1 Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock). 


ENTER 

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the command 

menu panel. 


4 Titles 

Recent first 

All Genres 

HDD 

SP 

Remain 

30h30m 

101 

9 

8 

7 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 

Play 

11/29Mon 23:00 Fri 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 2ch SP Title SP Name 

Set 2h00m(1.0G) 

Erase 

Thumbnail 


20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

Divide 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

Chapter Edit 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Set 

Multi-Mode 

Genre 


Name 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 


Cancel 

1h00m(1.0G) 

An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be 

unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator 

with a padlock icon. 

Move 


Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play 

List titles. 

1 Highlight the title you want to move. 


ENTER 

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the command 

menu panel. 

4 Titles 

DVD 

VR Mode 

Remain 

0h30m 


Play List 

ENTER 

1 

2 

3 

4 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM 

Play 

11/29Mon 23:00 Fri 7:00PM 3/12 Pr 7 2ch Title SP Name SP SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Erase 

Set 2h00m(1.0G) 

Thumbnail 


20:00 FRI 3/12 SP 

Divide 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 7 SP SP 

Chapter Edit 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Multi-Mode 

Move 

22:00 THU 2/12 7 SP Combine Genre Name 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 7 SP 


Cancel 

19:00 MON 29/11 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

3 Select a new position for the title. 

4 Titles 

DVD 

VR Mode 

Remain 

0h30m 


Play List 

1 

2 

3 

4 

Title to move 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM 

11/29Mon 23:00 Fri 7:00PM 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

20:00 FRI 3/12 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

22:00 THU 2/12 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

19:00 MON 29/11 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

1h00m(1.0G) 

1h00m(1.0G) 

Insert position 

MENU 

After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is 

displayed. 

111 

En

09 

112 

En 

Editing 

Combine 


Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one. 

1 Highlight the title you want to combine. 


This title will remain in the same place after combining 

with another title. 

ENTER 

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the 


4 Titles 

DVD 

VR Mode 

Remain 

0h30m 


Play List 

ENTER 

1 

2 

3 

4 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM 

Play 

11/29Mon 23:00 Fri 3/12 7:00PM Pr 7 2ch SP Title Name SP 

Erase 

Set 2h00m(1.0G) 

Thumbnail 


20:00 FRI 3/12 SP 

Divide 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 7 SP SP 

Chapter Edit 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Multi-Mode 

Move 

22:00 THU 2/12 SPCombine 

Genre Name 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP SP 


Cancel 

19:00 MON 29/11 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

3 Select another title to combine with the 

first. 

This title will be appended to the first title selected. 

The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended 

to title 1. 

4 Titles 

DVD 

VR Mode 

Remain 

0h30m 


Play List 

ENTER 

1 

2 

3 

4 

10Titles 

23:00 FRI 3/12 


2h00m(1.0G) 

20:00 FRI 3/12 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

22:00 THU 2/12 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

19:00 MON 29/11 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

1h00m(1.0G) 

1h00m(1.0G) 


! 

OK to combine titles 

1 and 3 ? 

Yes 

No 

MENU 

Genre Name 

HDD 

Use this command to rename one of the five userdefinable 

genres (Free 1 to Free 5). 

ENTER 

1 Select ‘Genre Name’ from the command 

menu panel. 


4 Titles 

Recent first 

All Genres 

HDD 

SP 

Remain 

30h30m 

ENTER 

101 

9 

8 

7 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 

Play 


2h00m(1.0G) 

Erase 

Edit 

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Genre Name 

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

Multi-Mode0G) 

Multi-Mode 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

2 Select one of the user-definable genre 

names. 


4 Titles 

Recent first 

All Genres 

HDD 

SP 

Remain 

30h30m 

ENTER 

101 

9 

8 

7 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 

Play 

11/29Mon 23:00 Fri 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 2ch SP Free1 SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Erase Free2 

Edit Free3 

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

Free4 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

Free5 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Multi-Mode 

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Cancel SPGenre 

Name 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

Cancel 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

3 Input a name for the genre. 

• The name can be up to 12 characters long. 

Input Genre Name 

Free 1 

CAPS 

small 

A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! 

N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; 

A A A A A A Æ ç E E E E I I I I # 

D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y ß $ % 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & 

£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ® 

2 3 

1 

´ µ · ¿ ` 

OK Clear Space 

_ + – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | } 

˚ 

~

Editing 09 

Multi-Mode 

HDD 

Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select 

a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way 

you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at 

once, for example. 

ENTER 

1 Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the command 

menu panel. 


4 Titles 

Recent first 

All Genres 

HDD 

SP 

Remain 

30h30m 

ENTER 

101 

9 

8 

7 

10Titles 

11/29 23:00 FRI MON 3/12 7:00PM Pr 4 SP 

Play 


2h00m(1.0G) 

Erase 

Edit 

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Genre Name 

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

Multi-Mode 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

2 Select titles from the title list. 

Selected titles are marked with a . 


ENTER 

3 Select the command that you want 

applied to all the marked titles. 

For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles. 


4 Titles 

Recent first 

All Genres 

HDD 

SP 

Remain 

30h30m 

101 

9 

8 

7 

Multi-Mode 

10Titles 

23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 4 SP 

Erase 

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP 

Lock 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Unlock 

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPChange 

Genre 

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SPSingle 

Mode 

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 

1h00m(1.0G) 

1h00m(1.0G) 

Once the command is completed, Multi-Mode is 

automatically exited. 

Undo 

DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW 

If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally 

undo it. There is one level of undo (in other words, you 

can only undo the last edit you made). 

ENTER 

• Select ‘Undo’ from the command menu 

panel. 

• You can’t undo anything after exiting the Disc 

Navigator screen. 


4 Titles 

Play List 

DVD 

VR Mode 

Remain 

0h30m 

1 

0Titles 

11/29 MON 7:00PM 

Play 

11/29Mon No title 

7:00PM 2ch SP 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Erase 

2h00m(1.0G) 

Create 

1h00m(1.0G) 

Undo 

Frequently asked questions 

• Why doesn’t the available recording time increase 

when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R? 

When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or DVD+R), the 

titles are no longer displayed, but the content 

remains on the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once 

media; they can’t be erased or rewritten. 

•I can’t edit my disc! 

You may find that as the available recording time is 

reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no 

longer possible. This is because information about 

your edits requires a certain amount of disc space. 

As you edit, this information builds up, eventually 

preventing you from editing further. 

Edit 

113 

En

10 

114 

En 

Copying and backup 

Chapter 10 


Introduction 

Use the copying features of this recorder to: 

• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to 

a DVD. 

• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play 

in another player. 

• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing. 

• Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD. 

The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch 

Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title 

to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy 

below for detailed instructions. 

For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a 

Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only 

copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 115 

for detailed instructions. 

Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at 

high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind 

of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be 

as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Minimum 

copying times on page 150 for more on copying times. 

If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a 

lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on 

the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is 

always done in real-time. 

When real-time copying from the HDD to a DVD-R/-RW 

(Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in 

the original material are not copied. Chapter markers are 

put into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto 

Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto 

Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 143). 

Restrictions on copying 

Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected using Copy 

Guard. These discs cannot be copied to the HDD. 

Some video material is copy-once protected. This means 

that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely 

copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected 

material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a CPRM ver. 1.1 

or higher VR mode DVD-RW, ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode 

DVD-R, or CPRM-compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM 

on page 80 for more on this). Only one instance of a copyonce 

protected title can be added to the Copy List, and 

after it’s been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it 

is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copyonce 

protected). 

You can identify copy-once protected material during 

playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the 

current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark 

( ! ) is shown. 

Copyright 

Recording equipment should be used only for lawful 

copying and you are advised to check carefully what is 

lawful copying in the country in which you are making a 

copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or 

music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception 

or consented to by the rightowners. 

One Touch Copy 

* See also Copyright above. 

The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing 

or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or 

DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of 

where in the title you start the copy. 

HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording 

mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in 

whatever recording mode is currently set. 

Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is loaded when 

trying to copy from the HDD. 

REC MODE 

1 If you’re copying from DVD to the HDD, 

select a recording mode. 

Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title 

playing will not result in a better quality recording. 


2 Press during playback to copy the current 

title. 

The front panel display indicates that the title is being 

copied. 

• High-speed copying is used when copying from the 

HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying. 

• Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to 

the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the 

title.

Copying and backup 10 

Cancelling One Touch Copy 

You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started. 


• Press and hold for more than a second. 

Copying is cancelled and the video already copied is 

erased. 

• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy, the space 

available for recording does not return to the precopy 

figure. 

Notes on copying using One Touch Copy 

Copying to DVD 

• Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail 

picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also 

copied. However, if you copy to a DVD-R/-RW (Video 

mode) or DVD+R/+RW, only the first 40 characters 

of a name are copied. 

• The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly 

the same positions as the original when recording on 

to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW. 

• You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a 

title if any part of the title is copy-once protected. 

•A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be 

copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/ 

+RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM 

disc for this type of material. 

• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes 1 ) widescreen 

material can’t be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) 

or DVD+R/+RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or 

DVD-RAM disc for this type of material. 

• When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode 

Off, titles recorded in LP/MN9 to MN15 modes 

cannot be high-speed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video 

mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW 

(VR mode) or DVD-RAM. 

• Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be highspeed 

copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or 

DVD+R/+RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) 

or DVD-RAM. 

• XP+ titles cannot be copied to DVD via One Touch 

Copy. 

• Titles over eight hours cannot be copied to singlelayer 

DVD+R/+RW discs using One Touch Copy. 

Use DVD+R DL discs for titles over eight hours. 

• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode 

cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using One Touch 

Copy. 

Copying to the HDD 

• The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours. 

• Title name and chapter markers are also copied, 

except when copying from a finalized Video mode 

DVD-R/-RW. 

• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for 

the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in 

the copy may be slightly changed from the original. 

• If some part of the title being copied is copy-protected, 

copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will 

not be copied. 

Using Copy Lists 

* See also Copyright on page 114. 

At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD 

titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to 

DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list, 

erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-naming titles, for 

example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not 

affect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ content 

of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify 

anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the 

actual content is not being altered. 

Copying from HDD to DVD 

Important 

• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. 

• The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System 

setting is changed (see Additional information about 

the TV system settings on page 146). 

• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see 

Resetting the recorder on page 161) will erase the 

Copy List. 

1 Load a recordable DVD. 

• It is possible to complete the following steps without 

having a recordable DVD loaded (or having an 

uninitialized DVD loaded); however, the steps are 

slightly different. 

• If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc for the 

copy, make sure it is initialized before you start. 

2 HOME MENU 

Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu. 

Note 

1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On). 

115 

En

10 

116 

En 


ENTER 

3 Select ‘HDD DVD’. 

HDD DVD 

DVD/CD HDD 

Disc Back-up 

• If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to 

step 5 below. 

4 If there is already a Copy List stored in the 

recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’ 

or ‘Continue Using Previous Copy List’. 

Continue Using Previous Copy List 

Create New Copy List 

• If you select Continue Using Previous Copy List, 

skip to step 10 below. 

• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy 

List already stored in the recorder. 

ENTER 

5 Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a 

title and press ENTER to add). 

Copy HDD DVD (Video mode) 

8 Title 

Select Title 

1 > 2 > 3 

8 WED 29/03 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP Pr 2 

7 

6 

MON 27/03 21:00 Mon 27/03 Pr 4 SP 

SAT 25/03 23:00 Sat 25/03 Pr 9 SP 

Pr 4 

Pr 9 

Back 

Recent first 5 THU 23/03 22:00 Thu 23/03 Pr 6 SP Pr 6 

4 WED 22/03 20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP Pr 2 

All Genres 

3 

2 

1 

MON 20/03 13:00 Mon 20/03 Pr 9 SP 

FRI 17/03 21:00 Fri 17/03 Pr 4 SP 

WED 15/03 20:00 Wed 15/03 Pr 2 SP 

20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 

Pr 9 

Pr 4 

Pr 2 

Next 

20:00 1h00m(2.0G) Pr 2 

Sports SP 

Copy List Total 

Current DVD Remain 

0.0G 

4.3G 

Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in 

pink. 

There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to 

the Copy List if you are copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video 

mode) or DVD+R/+RW: 

• When adding titles that contain copy-once protected 

material, the copy-once parts will not be added. 

• When adding titles that contain material of more 

than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a 

different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title 

if high-speed copying is possible. 

Depending on the title 1 , high-speed copying may not be 

possible to DVDs. 

6 Press to display the command menu panel. 

The Command Menu panel 


8 Title 

Select Title 

1 > 2 > 3 

8 WED 29/03 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP Pr 2 

7 

6 

MON 27/03 21:00 Mon 27/03 Pr 4 SP 

SAT 25/03 23:00 Sat 25/03 Pr 9 SP 

Pr 4 

Pr 9 

Back 

Recent first 5 THU 23/03 22:00 Thu 23/03 Pr 6 SP Pr 6 

4 WED 22/03 20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP Pr 2 

All Genres 

3 

2 

1 

MON 20/03 13:00 Mon 20/03 Pr 9 SP 

FRI 17/03 21:00 Fri 17/03 Pr 4 SP 

WED 15/03 20:00 Wed 15/03 Pr 2 SP 

Pr 9 

Pr 4 

Pr 2 

Next 

20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 

20:00 1h00m(2.0G) Pr 2 

Sports SP 


4.3G 

Current DVD Remain 4.3G 

7 Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen. 


Title Edit 

1 > 2 > 3 

1 20:00 Wed 29/03 Pr 2 SP 

2 20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP 



20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 

Note 

1 The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD+R/+RW: 

• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode. 

The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD-R/-RW (Video Mode) and DVD+R/+RW: 

• Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On)). 

• LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off. 

• Bilingual recordings. 

• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes. 

The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for any types of DVD: 

• XP+ titles. 

4.3G 

4.3G 

1h00m(2.0G) 

2 Title 

Back 

Next


8 To edit a title, highlight it using the / buttons, 



Title Edit 

1 > 2 > 3 

1 20:00 Wed 29/03 Pr 2 SP 

Erase 

2 20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP 

Title Name 

Erase Section 

Move 

Preview 

Cancel 



20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 

4.3G 

4.3G 

A menu of editing commands appears: 

1h00m(2.0G) 

2 Title 

• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see 

Erase on page 106). 

• Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List 

(see Title Name on page 107). 

• Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see Erase Section 

on page 108). 

• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List 

(see Move on page 111). 

• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy 

List. 

• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see 

Divide on page 109). 

• Combine – Combine two titles in the Copy List into 

one (see Combine on page 112). 

• Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a Copy List title 

(see Chapter Edit on page 109): 

• Divide – Divide a chapter into two. 

• Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/Change the 

chapter order. 

• Combine – Combine two chapters into one. 

• Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail frame for a title 

(see Set Thumbnail on page 108). 

• Recording Mode – Set the picture quality of the copy 

(see Recording Mode on page 118). 

• Bilingual – Set how bilingual audio should be copied 

when copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) 

and DVD+R/+RW (see Bilingual on page 119). 

• Cancel – Exit the menu. 

Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need 

editing. 

9 Display the command menu panel. 

Note 

1 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized. 

Back 

Next 

ENTER 

10 Select ‘Next’ to proceed. 


Title Edit 

1 > 2 > 3 

1 20:00 Wed 29/03 Pr 2 SP 

2 20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP 



20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 

4.3G 

4.3G 

1h00m(2.0G) 

2 Title 

There are several options available from the next screen: 

• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the 

recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 118). 

• Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the 

disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a 

VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc 

or DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is similar to that 

of naming titles; see Title Name on page 107.) 

• Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a 

DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R after copying. 1 

Select a title menu style from the following screen. 

ENTER 

11 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying. 

Copy HDD DVD (Video Mode) 

Start Copy 

1 > 2 > 3 

HDD 

DVD-RW 

Video Mode 

Copy Time 0h 16m 

Recording Mode 

Disc Name 

High-Speed 

Finalize 

Off 


4.3G 

Current DVD Remain 4.3G 

• If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc and 

the copy will span both layers, the Copy List Total 

bar will be purple. 

• The Current DVD Remain bar will be half-length if 

the first layer of a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc is 

already full. 

Back 

Next 

Back 


Input Disc Name 

Finalize 

Start Copy 

117 

En

10 

118 

En 


Copying from DVD to HDD 

Important 

• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t accessible when 

a finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW or a DVD-Video is 

loaded. As long as the disc is not Copy Guard 

protected, you can still use the One Touch Copy 

function, however (See One Touch Copy on 

page 114). 

• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. 

• The Copy List will be erased if: 

– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or 

edited. 

– the disc tray is opened. 

– playback is switched between Play List and 

Original. 

– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized. 

– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see 

Resetting the recorder on page 161). 

• It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that 

was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC. 

1 HOME MENU Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu. 

ENTER 

2 Select ‘DVD/CD HDD’. 

ENTER 

3 Select a Copy List type. 

• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy 

List already stored in the recorder. 

ENTER 

4 Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a 

title and press ENTER to add). 

Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in 

pink. 

ENTER 

5 Select ‘Next’ from the command menu 

panel to proceed to the title edit screen. 

6 Select a title to edit. 

A menu appears of Copy List editing commands: 

• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see 

Erase on page 106). 

• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List 

(see Move on page 111). 

• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy 

List. 

• Cancel – Exit the menu. 

Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need 

editing. 

7 Select ‘Next’ from the command menu 

panel to proceed to the copy options screen. 

• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the 

recording quality (see Recording Mode below). 

8 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying. 


1 Select ‘Recording Mode’ from the 


2 Select a recording mode for the copy. 

• High-Speed Copy 1 – The Copy List is copied at the 

same recording quality as the original. 

• XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN 2 – The Copy List is 

copied at the specified recording quality in real-time. 

(Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than 

the original, the copy will not be better quality than 

the original.) 

If you select MN above, you can also change the level 

setting (MN1 to MN32 3 , LPCM or XP+ 4 ) from the 

Recording Quality box that appears. 

Note 

1 When copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as 

the original. 

2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter 

markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see 

also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 143). 

3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available. 

4 XP+ mode available only when copying to HDD. 

ENTER 

ENTER 

ENTER 

ENTER 

ENTER


• Optimized 1,2 – The recording quality is automatically 

adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space 

available on the disc. Copying is carried out in realtime. 

When you change the recording mode setting, you can 

see how much disc space it will require. If this is more 

than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able 

to start copying. In this case, either change the recording 

quality, or press RETURN/EXIT to go back to the Copy List 

screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List. 

Bilingual 

1 Select the title containing the audio you 

want to change. 

ENTER 

2 Select ‘Bilingual’ from the command 

menu panel. 

ENTER 

3 Select a bilingual audio option. 

Using disc backup 

* See also Copyright on page 114. 

This feature offers a simple way to make a backup copy 

of finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) discs or DVD+R/ 

+RW discs. The data is copied first to the hard disk 

drive 3 , then on to another recordable DVD disc. 

1 HOME MENU Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc backup’ from 

the Home Menu. 

2 Select a backup option. 

There are three backup options: 

• Start new disc back-up – Start making a backup of 

a disc. 

• Resume writing data – Record the backup data 

already on the HDD to a recordable DVD. 

• Erase back-up data – Erase the backup data on the 

HDD. 

3 Load the disc you want to make a backup of. 

You can only make backup copies of finalized Video mode 

DVD-R/-RW discs, finalized DVD+R or DVD+RW discs 

(excluding DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs). 

Note 

1 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter 

markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see 

also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 143). 

2 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD. Due to remaining space on the disc or the title that you copy, this mode does not always 

exactly fill a disc. 

3 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD. 

ENTER 

Disc Back-up 

Disc Back-up 

Start new disc back-up 

Resume writing data 

Erase back-up data 

No disc. 

Please load a disc to be backed-up. 

Start Cancel 

119 

En

10 

120 

En 


ENTER 

4 Select ‘Start’. 

Disc Back-up 

Read from disc and save to HDD. 

Start reading? 

Start Cancel 

• To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY. 

• You can cancel the backup process by pressing 

ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. 

5 When the data has been copied, take out the disc 

and load a blank* recordable DVD. 

* If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the disc doesn’t 

have to be blank, although the previous contents of the 

disc will be erased in the backup process. 

Disc Back-up 

Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive. 

Please eject the disc and load a 

recordable disc 

Start Cancel 

You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2 disc, or DVD-RW 

ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the backup. 

• If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot 

undo the finalization later. 

• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may 

be cases where the contents of the disc you’re 

backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If 

this happens, please try another brand of disc. 

• DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up to DVD-R/ 

-RW discs; DVD+R/+RW discs can only be backed 

up to DVD+R/+RW discs. 

6 Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data 

to the blank disc. 

Disc Back-up 

Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive. 

The disc contents will be overwritten. 

OK to start? 

Start Cancel 

• To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY. 

• You can cancel the backup process by pressing 

ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. 

However, this will make the disc unusable (although 

if you are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc you can 

re-initialize it in order to make it usable again — see 

Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 89.) 

7 After the recorder has finished recording the 

backup disc, you can select whether to make another 

backup of the same data or exit. 

Disc Back-up 

Disc back-up finished. 

To make another back-up copy, please load 

a recordable disc. 

Start Cancel 

• Select Start to make another backup copy or Cancel 

to finish. If you want to make another backup copy, 

return to step 6 above. 

8 If you don’t need to keep the backup data on the 

HDD, you can delete it now. 

Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to 

keep it (you can delete it later if you want to). 

Disc Back-up 

The backed-up data is still on the HDD. 

Erasing it will increase the free space 

available. OK to Erase? 

Yes No 

• If you decide to leave the backup data on the HDD, 

you can make backup copies to recordable DVD 

discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.

Using the Jukebox 11 

Chapter 11 

Using the Jukebox 

The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder’s 

HDD to store and playback music from up to 999 of your 

CDs. You can also transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CD 

-R/-RW/-ROM, DVD, USB device or PC. Once on the 

HDD, you can name albums and tracks, assign them a 

genre, and set tracks that you don’t want to play to Jump. 

Copying music to the HDD 

The first step is to copy some music to the HDD. CD 

audio, WMA and MP3 files are copied at high speed. All 

tracks are copied from each CD/DVD as an album. 1 

WMA/MP3 album and track names are copied along with 

the audio. CD album and track names are not copied, but 

you can add these later (see Editing Jukebox albums on 

page 124). 

Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in the order 

they appear on the CD/DVD. 

Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot 

be copied to a recordable DVD disc. 

Important 

• While copying, no other recorder operation is 

possible. 

• When copying, scheduled timer recordings will not 

start until copying is complete. 

• Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully. 

1 Load the CD/DVD you want to copy to the HDD. 

2 HOME MENU Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu. 

ENTER 

3 Select ‘DVD/CD to HDD’. 

On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the CD or all 

WMA/MP3 files on the DVD are copied to the HDD. 

• You can also start copying by starting playback of the 

CD/DVD and then pressing ONE TOUCH COPY. 

• To cancel copying press ENTER. 

• If the CD loaded contains both CD audio tracks and 

WMA/MP3 files, the part currently selected will play. 

Copying files via USB 

Connecting a regular USB device 

You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a connected USB 

device, such as a USB drive, to the HDD. 

1 Connect the USB device. 

2 HOME MENU Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu. 

3 Select ‘Listen to Music from USB Device’. 

4 Select ‘Copy Album’ from the command 

menu panel. 


The selected folder on the USB device will be copied to 

the HDD. 

• Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB device can be 

copied/displayed. 

Connect PC 

Using a USB connection, you can copy WMA and MP3 

files from a PC to the HDD of this device. Operations 

carried out on the PC require Windows Media Player 10. 

Important 

• If the PC you are using does not currently have 

Windows Media Player 10 installed, you must first 

install the program and make sure it functions 

correctly before connecting the USB cable and 

attempting to use the Connect PC function. 

• For more information on Connect PC, see Using a PC 

on page 55. 

• You cannot edit or delete albums from this device 

when it is connected to a PC via USB. If you wish to 

edit or delete albums via the Jukebox, you must first 

disconnect the USB cable. 

Note 

1• Up to 999 albums can be created in the Jukebox. If you copy via Connect PC, the total number of albums you are able to create may be less 

than 999 (for more information, see page 123). 

• Sound quality is not worsened when you copy data from another source. 

• When playing back an album copied from a source whose original audio track plays continuously (such as a live recording), there will be a 

brief pause in sound between tracks. 

ENTER 

ENTER 

ENTER 

121 

En

11 

122 

En 


1 Connect the PC via USB cable. 

The screen below is displayed. Choose ‘Take no action’ 

and click ‘OK’. 

*Depending on the settings for Windows Media Player 

10, the screen shown below may not be displayed. 


ENTER 

3 Select ‘Connect PC’. 

ENTER 

'Take no action' 

'OK' 


5 Verify that the import screen is displayed on the 

device. 

If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes, the import 

screen is automatically closed. To reopen it, you will have 

to repeat steps 2 through 4. 

Status 

Connect PC 

Number of copied 

folders 

Standby 

000 Folders ( 000 error ) 

000000 Files ( 000 error ) 

Number of copied files 

Number of files 

unable to be copied 

Exit 

6 Open Windows Media Player 10 on the PC. 

The device settings screen appears. Click ‘Cancel’. 

*Depending on the settings for Windows Media Player 

10, the screen shown below may not be displayed. 

From the PC, in Windows Media Player 10: 

'Cancel' 

1. Click ‘Library’. 

2. Choose the artist, album or song you would 

like to copy, and press the right mouse button. 

3. Click ‘Add to Sync list’ (when choosing songs, 

click ‘Add to’ then ‘Sync list’). 

4. Click ‘Start Sync’. 

This begins the synchronization process. When finished, 

the message ‘Synchronized to Device’ is displayed in 

Windows Media Player 10. 

'Start Sync'

Using the Jukebox 11 

For more information refer to the Help menu of Windows 

Media Player 10. 

Progress Bar 

Connect PC 

Copying 

001 Folders ( 000 error ) 

000003 Files ( 000 error ) 

• To cancel the synchronization process while it is 

underway, press ENTER on the remote control. The 

Connect PC screen is closed. 

• If synchronization fails, make sure that the Pioneer. 

HDD/DVD-Recorder device is selected at the 

synchronization screen of Windows Media Player 10, 

and try again. 

7 When you have finished copying files, close 

Windows Media Player 10 on the PC. 

ENTER 

8 Close the import screen on this device. 

• If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes after 

copying, the import screen is automatically closed. 

Note 

• When using the sync function of Windows Media 

Player 10, music, artist and album folders are created 

as follows: 

Root 

Music Artist 1 Album 1 

Album 2 

Artist 2 Album 1 

• Folders containing no files are not displayed in the 

Jukebox (such as the above ‘Artist1’ and ‘Artist2’ 

folders), but do count toward the maximum of 999 

folders allowed in Jukebox. 

• Up to 999 tracks can be included in one album. Note 

that when there are many tracks contained in one 

album, it may take time to display and transfer these 

tracks. 

• Albums and tracks with no set name that are 

transferred from CD/DVD/USB are displayed as 

‘UnknownAlbum’ and ‘UnknownFile’ in Windows 

Media Player 10. 

Exit 

music1.mp3 

music2.mp3 

music1.wma 

music1.mp3 

• Album and track names that do not conform to the 

ISO8859-1 standard may display differently in 

Windows Media Player 10 and the Jukebox. 

• When albums are deleted in the Jukebox, their file 

hierarchy as displayed in Windows Media Player may 

change. 

• File whose extensions are not supported by the 

Jukebox (i.e. files that are not .mp3 or .wma) cannot 

be transferred. 

• Files imported to this recorder via Connect PC cannot 

be exported from this recorder. 

• Note that no recording functions, including timer 

recordings, will be carried out when you are using the 

Connect PC function. 

Playing music from the Jukebox 

You can select albums or individual tracks from the 

Jukebox to play. 


ENTER 

2 Select a Jukebox option. 

• Listen to Music/Edit – Listen to CDs or WMA/MP3 

files that have been copied to the HDD. 

You can also access this option directly by pressing 

JUKEBOX. 

• Listen to Music from USB device – Listen to music 

from an external USB device. 

ENTER 

3 Select what you want to play. 

The screen below shows albums stored on the HDD: 

Jukebox 

By number 

All Genres 

Remain 

47.0 G 

HDD 

Album name 

3 

4 

Album1 

Album2 

ALL 

1 

5 Album3 

2 

6 Album4 

3 

7 Album5 

4 

8 Album6 

5 

9 

10 

Album7 

Album8 

6 

7 

Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup 

iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical 

Total 12 70 MB 

10Albums 

Info for selected album Playback status 

Play 

Erase 

Edit 

Play Mode 

Genre Name 

3-10 

0.03.58 

• If you select a whole album to play, all tracks that are 

not set to Jump will play. 

123 

En

11 

124 

En 


• If you want to start playback from a selected track in 

an album, or play a track that is set to Jump, press 

to enter the track list then select a track to play. 

Jukebox 

By number 

3 

4 

5 

Album1 

Album2 

Album3 

ALL 

1 Mars 

2 Venus 

6 Album4 3 Mercury 

All Genres 7 Album5 4 Jupiter 

8 Album6 5 Saturn 

9 

10 

Album7 

Album8 

6 Uranus 

7 Neptune 

Jupiter 

HDD 

MP3 8 MB 

Remain 

47.0 G 

• Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change the page. 

Changing the album view 

1 From the album list, display the view 

options menu panel. 

ENTER 

2 Select a view option. 

• Sort order 

Track name 

classical 

10Albums 

Play 

Erase 

Edit 

Play Mode 

Genre Name 

3-10 

0.03.58 

Jukebox 

10Albums 

By number 

Play 

Erase 

Edit 

Play Mode 

All Genres 

Genre Name 


HDD 

Remain 

47.0 G 



3-10 

0.03.58 

3 Album1 

Sort order 

By number 4 Album2 

By number 

By favourite 

5 Album3 

By album 

Genre 6 Album4 

ALL 

1 

2 

3 

All Genres 7 Album5 

4 

Cancel 

8 Album6 

5 

9 

10 

Album7 

Album8 

6 

7 

By number – Albums are listed by the album 

number. 

By favourite – Most often listened to music appears 

at the top of the list. 

By album – Albums are listed alphabetically. 

Note 

1 Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback. 

• Genre 

Jukebox 

10Albums 

By number 

Play 

Erase 

Edit 

Play Mode 

All Genres 

Genre Name 


HDD 

Remain 

47.0 G 



3-10 

0.03.58 

3 Album1 

Sort order 

All Genres 4 Album2 

By number 

No Category 

5 Album3 

Best 

Genre Rock 6 Album4 

ALL 

1 

2 

3 

All Genres Pop 7 Album5 

4 

Jazz 

8 

Classical 

9 

10 

Album6 

Album7 

Album8 

5 

6 

7 

All Genres – All albums are displayed. 

Genre – Only albums in the selected genre are 

displayed. 

Editing Jukebox albums 

A number of commands are available for editing and 

changing the playback behavior of albums. 

JUKEBOX 

1 Press to display the Jukebox screen. 

ENTER 

2 Select what you want to edit. 

ENTER 

3 Select an edit function from the command 

menu panel. 

• Erase – Erase the selected track (if all tracks in an 

album are selected, the whole album is erased). 

• Edit > Album name – Enter a name of up to 64 

characters for the album. See Title Name on page 107 

for how to enter names. 

• Edit > Track name – Enter a name of up to 64 

characters for the track. See Title Name on page 107 

for how to enter names. 

• Edit > Set Genre – Set or change the genre for the 

album. 

• Edit > Jump Set 1 – Set a track to jump so that it 

doesn’t play (choose this command again to cancel 

the Jump setting). 

• Play Mode – Change the playback order for albums 

and tracks. 

• Genre Name – Enter a name of up to 12 characters 

for a genre. See Title Name on page 107 for how to 

enter names.

The PhotoViewer 12 

Chapter 12 

The PhotoViewer 

From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and 

picture files stored on the HDD, recordable DVD or CD-R/ 

-RW/-ROM, or on a USB-equipped digital camera. 1 You 

can also import files and save them to the recorder’s 

HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc. 

Locating JPEG picture files 

1 HOME MENU Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the Home 

Menu. 

ENTER 

2 Select the location of the files you want 

to view or edit. 

View/Edit Photos on the HDD 

View Photos on a CD/DVD 

View Photos on a USB Device 

Copy Files from a Digital Camera 

• View/Edit Photos on the HDD – View or edit photos 

already stored on the recorder’s HDD. 

• View Photos on a CD/DVD – View photos on a 

Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD-R/-RW, or DVD-R/-RW. 

• View Photos on a USB Device – View photos on a 

digital camera (or other USB device) connected to 

the USB port. 

• Copy Files from a Digital Camera – Copy all DCF 

files directly from a connected digital camera to a 

recordable DVD-R/-RW. 

ENTER 

3 Select the folder containing the files you 

want to view, copy or edit. 

The first image from the selected folder is displayed as 

thumbnail at the bottom of the screen. From the Folder 

Information column, you can change thumbnails via the 

/ buttons. 

PhotoViewer HDD 

Select Folder 

001 Folder1 

002 Folder2 

Folder 003 Folder3 

004 Folder4 

005 Folder5 

006 Folder6 

007 Folder7 

008 Folder8 

HDD 

Remain 

100.0 G 

Currently selected 

folder in folder list 

002 Folder2 

Files 999 

Folder 999 MB 

Folder information 

4 Select the file you want to view, copy or 

edit. 

Currently selected 

thumbnail 


Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 

001 PIOR0000 

002 PIOR0001 

File 

003 PIOR0002 

004 PIOR0003 

005 PIOR0004 

12 Files 006 PIOR0005 

007 PIOR0006 

008 PIOR0007 

009 PIOR0008 

010 PIOR0009 

HDD 

011 PIOR0010 

Remain 012 PIOR0011 

100.0 G 

• The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder 

to load the file. 

• You can change folders via the / buttons. 

• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that 

the disc and file formats are compatible with this 

recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created 

disc compatibility on page 46). 

• The thumbnail of files that cannot be played is 

displayed as the logo. 

Note 

1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected USB camera it is still possible 

to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB device on page 127). 

1/3 

1/84 

FOLDER 

MENU 

Pages in 

folder list 

FILE 

MENU 

Pages in 

file list 

125 

En

12 

126 

En 


Changing the display style of the 

PhotoViewer 

You can choose to display photos by grouping them by 

folder, file, or number of thumbnails. 

1 Display the View Options panel. 

The View Options panel 



Display Mode 001 PIOR0000 

File 002 PIOR0001 

File 

003 PIOR0002 

Style 

004 PIOR0003 

12 Files 

005 PIOR0004 

12 Files 006 PIOR0005 

007 PIOR0006 

008 PIOR0007 

009 PIOR0008 

010 PIOR0009 

HDD 

011 PIOR0010 

Remain 012 PIOR0011 

100.0 G 

ENTER 

2 Choose ‘Display Mode’ or ‘Style’ then 

press ENTER to see the available view options. 

• Display Mode – Choose between folder and file 

display modes. 

• Style – Choose between displays of 1, 4 and 12 

thumbnails. 

ENTER 

3 Choose a view option, then press ENTER. 

The display mode will change to that which you have 

chosen. 

1/84 

FILE 

MENU 

Playing a slideshow 

ENTER 

1 Select a folder from the folder list. 

To start the slideshow from the first file in the folder, skip to 

step 3 after choosing the desired folder and pressing . 

2 Select a thumbnail. 

• Use PREV and NEXT to display the 

previous/next page of thumbnails. 

ENTER 

3 Select ‘Start Slideshow’ or ‘Start Audio 

Slideshow’ from the menu. 

When you select ‘Start Audio Slideshow’, you are 

prompted to select the Genre of music you would like to 

hear, and when you press ENTER, music of that Genre 

stored on the Jukebox will be played during the 

slideshow. 

For more information on adding music to the HDD, see 

Using the Jukebox on page 121. 

• You can also select a file or folder then press PLAY 

to start playing the slideshow. 

• Use PREV/ NEXT to display the previous/ 

next picture, or PAUSE to pause the slideshow. 

• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be 

displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and 

right. 

• Large picture files may take a few seconds to display. 

This is normal. 

STOP 

4 Press to return to the thumbnail. 

• You can also use the RETURN/EXIT button. 

5 HOME MENU 

Press to exit the PhotoViewer.


Zooming an image 

During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion 

of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move 

the area of the picture displayed. 

ENTER 1 Press during the slideshow to zoom the 

picture. 

Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and 

4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen. 

2 Use to move the zoomed area. 

Rotating an image 

You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow 

so you can always view pictures the right way up, 

whichever way they were taken. 

ANGLE 

• + Press during the slideshow to rotate 

MAIN SUB 

the displayed picture clockwise by 90º. 

Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in 

increments of 90º. 

Reloading files from a disc or USB 

device 

If you have a disc with more than 1000 files and/or 100 

folders, you can still view all the images using the reload 

function. 

1 Navigate to the last entry in the folder 

list (‘Read next: ...’). 

2 Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 

folders from the disc or connected USB device. 

It will take a moment (at most a few minutes) to load in 

the images. 1 

ENTER 

Importing files to the HDD 

You can import files and save them to the HDD 2 from a 

CD, DVD or a connected USB camera. Once on the HDD 

you can edit and organize your pictures and print them 

out if you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible printer. 

1 Select the location of folders/files you 

want to import. 

To import a whole folder, select the desired folder, press 

, and skip to step 3 below. 

• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see 

Selecting multiple files or folders on page 128. 

2 Select a file to import, then press . 

• To import multiple files, use the Multi-Mode; see 


3 Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the menu. 

4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and copy the 

folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to cancel. 

• The files will be copied to the HDD with the same 

folder structure as the original. 

• Importing to the HDD will not work if there is 

insufficient space on the HDD, or if there are already 

the maximum number of files and/or folders on the 

HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder). 

Note 

1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will 

resume reloading.) 

2 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW. 

ENTER 

ENTER 

File 

HDD 

Remain 

100.0 G 

ENTER 

PhotoViewer CD/DVD 


12 Files 

001 PIOR0000 

002 PIOR0001 

003 PIOR0002 

004 PIOR0003 

005 PIOR0004 

006 PIOR0005 

007 PIOR0006 

008 PIOR0007 

009 PIOR0008 

010 PIOR0009 

011 PIOR0010 

012 PIOR0011 

Start Slideshow 

Copy all to HDD 

Copy to HDD 

Print 

Detailed InformationFILE 

MENU 

Multi-Mode 

1/84 

127 

En

12 

128 

En 


Selecting multiple files or folders 

The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple folders/files 

at once for importing or editing. 

ENTER 

1 Select the folder containing the files you 

want to import. 

2 Display the command menu. 

ENTER 

3 Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the menu. 


Select Folder 

001 Folder1 

002 Folder2 

Folder 003 Folder3 

004 Folder4 

005 Folder5 

006 Folder6 

Remain 

100.0 G 

ENTER 

HDD 

007 Folder7 

008 Folder8 

002 Folder2 

Files 999 

Folder 999 MB 


Start Audio Slideshow 

New Folder 

Folder Options 

Copy to DVD 

Multi-Mode 

4 Select files/folders from the list. 

An orange check mark box() is shown by the item you 

selected. A blue check mark box () appears on the folder 

select screen when files from that folder are selected. 

Folder 

Remain 

100.0 G 

HDD 

Multi-Mode 

Select Folder 

001 Folder1 

002 Folder2 

003 Folder3 

004 Folder4 

005 Folder5 

006 Folder6 

007 Folder7 

008 Folder8 

002 Folder2 

Files 999 

Folder 999 MB 



ENTER 

6 Select the command you want to apply 

to all the selected items. 

1/3 

1/3 

FOLDER 

MENU 

FOLDER 

MENU 

Note 

1• There is a limit to the number of files/amount of data that you can copy at one time. 

• Only DCF format files in DCIM folders can be copied to a recordable DVD-R/-RW. 

Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW 

Using this feature you can copy all the files 1 (including 

audio and movie files) stored on a connected USB 

camera to a recordable DVD disc. 

A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a 

Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on 

other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible 

with JPEG file playback. 

Once the files have been copied, the disc is automatically 

finalized. 

Important 

• Use a blank DVD-R/-RW disc, or one that has already 

been initialized for Video mode recording but has 

nothing yet recorded on it. Discs that have already 

been recorded on (as well as CD-R/-RW discs) cannot 

be used. 

• After backing up the pictures in your digital camera 

to DVD, we recommend verifying that they have been 

recorded properly before deleting anything from the 

camera. 

1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoViewer’ to 

display the PhotoViewer screen. 

2 Load a blank (or unrecorded Video mode) DVD-R 

or DVD-RW disc. 

3 Select ‘Copy Files from a Digital Camera’ from the 

menu. 

View/Edit Photos on the HDD 

View Photos on a CD/DVD 

View Photos on a USB Device 

Copy Files from a Digital Camera 


• Note that during copying, any timer programmes set 

to start will not begin, and no other operations are 

possible.


Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW 

This feature allows you just to copy some of the files 

stored on HDD to a DVD. 

A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a 

Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on 

other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible 

with JPEG file playback. Note however that you may need 

to finalize the disc before it will play on another DVD 

player (copying selected files doesn’t automatically 

finalize the disc). 

Important 

•A maximum of 99 slideshow titles can be recorded. 

• One slideshow title can contain up to 99 files. If there 

are more files than this in the slideshow, multiple 

slideshows are created on the disc. 

• If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the 

slideshow will become unplayable but the free space 

will not increase. 

1 Load a blank (or unfinalized Video mode) DVD-R 

or DVD-RW disc. 

ENTER 

2 Select ‘View/Edit Photos on the HDD’ 

from the menu. 

ENTER 

3 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to 

copy. 

• Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it. 

• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see 


ENTER 

4 Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the menu. 

ENTER 


• Folder names on the disc will be number PIONR. File 

names will be PHOT number. 

• Note that during copying, any timer programmes set 

to start will not begin, and no other operation is 

possible. 

• While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can press ENTER to 

cancel. 

Editing files on the HDD 

There are a number of commands you can use to edit and 

organize your pictures stored on the HDD. 

Creating a new folder 

1 From the folder list, display the menu. 

ENTER 

2 Select ‘New Folder’. 

The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the 

name F_number. 


Select Folder 

Folder 

001 Folder1 

002 Folder2 

003 Folder3 



New Folder 

004 Folder4 

Folder Options 

005 Folder5 

006 Folder6 

007 Folder7 

008 Folder8 

Copy to DVD 

Multi-Mode 

FOLDER 

MENU 

HDD 

002 Folder2 

Files 999 

Remain 

100.0 G 

Folder 999 MB 

1/3 

• There can be up to 999 folders on the HDD. 

Erasing a file or folder 


erase. 

• To erase multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode; 

see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 128. 

• Erasing a folder will erase all the files contained in it. 

Please be careful! 

• You can’t erase files that have been locked. 

• Folders containing locked files can’t be erased. 

Unlocked files in the folder, however, will be erased. 


129 

En

12 

130 

En 


ENTER 

3 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’. 

File 

HDD 

Remain 

100.0 G 

ENTER 

4 Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’. 


• You can also erase a file or folder by pressing CLEAR 

when the file or folder is highlighted. Press ENTER to 

confirm. 

Copying files 



12 Files 

001 PIOR0000 

002 PIOR0001 

003 PIOR0002 

004 PIOR0003 

005 PIOR0004 

006 PIOR0005 

007 PIOR0006 

008 PIOR0007 

009 PIOR0008 

010 PIOR0009 

011 PIOR0010 

012 PIOR0011 



File Options 

Print 

Copy to DVD FILE 

MENU 

Detailed Information 

Multi-Mode 


copy. 

• Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it. 

• To copy multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode; 

see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 128. 



1/84 



File 

12 Files 

001 PIOR0000 

002 PIOR0001 

003 PIOR0002 

004 PIOR0003 

005 PIOR0004 

006 PIOR0005 


Erase 


Copy 

File Options 

Rename File 

Print 

Lock 


MENU 


007 PIOR0006 

008 PIOR0007 

009 PIOR0008 

Multi-Mode 

Cancel 

HDD 

010 PIOR0009 

011 PIOR0010 

Remain 

100.0 G 

012 PIOR0011 

1/84 

ENTER 

ENTER 

ENTER 

4 Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder Contents’. 

File 

HDD 

Remain 

100.0 G 

ENTER 



12 Files 

001 PIOR0000 

002 PIOR0001 

003 PIOR0002 

004 PIOR0003 

005 PIOR0004 

006 PIOR0005 

007 PIOR0006 

008 PIOR0007 

009 PIOR0008 

010 PIOR0009 

011 PIOR0010 

012 PIOR0011 

5 Select a folder to copy the folder(s)/ 

file(s) to. 

ENTER 


• Copying to the HDD will not work if there is 

insufficient space on the HDD; if there are already the 

maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD. 

Naming files and folders 


Erase 


Copy 

File Options 

Rename File 

Print 

Lock 


MENU 


Multi-Mode 

Cancel 

1 Select the file or folder you want to rename. 

You can’t rename files that have been locked. 


3 Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename Folder’. 

File 

HDD 

Remain 

100.0 G 



12 Files 

001 PIOR0000 

002 PIOR0001 

003 PIOR0002 

004 PIOR0003 

005 PIOR0004 

006 PIOR0005 

007 PIOR0006 

008 PIOR0007 

009 PIOR0008 

010 PIOR0009 

011 PIOR0010 

012 PIOR0011 

4 Enter a new name for the file/folder. 

File names or Folder names can be up to 64 characters 

long. 

See Using a USB keyboard to enter a name on page 107 

for how to enter a name. 

1/84 


Erase 


Copy 

File Options 

Rename File 

Print 

Lock 


MENU 


Multi-Mode 

Cancel 

1/84


Locking/Unlocking files 

Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure 

and prevent them from being renamed. 

Use the same process to both lock and unlock files. 

Locked files are displayed in the PhotoViewer with a 

padlock icon. 

1 Select the file(s) you want to lock (or 

unlock). 

• To lock/unlock multiple files or folders, use the Multi- 

Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on 

page 128. 


ENTER 


ENTER 

4 Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder Contents’. 



File 

12 Files 

001 PIOR0000 

002 PIOR0001 

003 PIOR0002 

004 PIOR0003 

005 PIOR0004 

006 PIOR0005 


Erase 


Copy 

File Options 

Rename File 

Print 

Lock 


MENU 


007 PIOR0006 

008 PIOR0007 

009 PIOR0008 

Multi-Mode 

Cancel 

HDD 

010 PIOR0009 

011 PIOR0010 

Remain 

100.0 G 

012 PIOR0011 

1/84 

Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them. 

To remove all locks within a given folder, choose ‘Folder 

Option’ > ‘Unlock Folder Contents’. 

To view detailed information 

This feature allows you to check the settings of the 

camera from which you imported the photos. 

1 Choose the file for which you would like to see 

detailed information. 

2 Choose ‘Detailed Information’. 

When no detailed information is available, nothing is 

displayed. 

Note 

1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly. 

Printing files 

Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB 

port will enable you to print out picture files 1 stored on 

the HDD, a CD/DVD, or directly from a digital camera. 

Make sure that the printer (and your digital camera if you 

are using that as a source) is connected to the recorder 

before starting. 

1 Select the file(s) you want to print. 

• To print multiple files, use the Multi-Mode; see 



ENTER 

3 Select ‘Print’ from the menu. 

File 

HDD 

Remain 

100.0 G 

ENTER 



12 Files 

001 PIOR0000 

002 PIOR0001 

003 PIOR0002 

004 PIOR0003 

005 PIOR0004 

006 PIOR0005 

007 PIOR0006 

008 PIOR0007 

009 PIOR0008 

010 PIOR0009 

011 PIOR0010 

012 PIOR0011 



File Options 

Print 


MENU 


Multi-Mode 

4 Select ‘Start’ to confirm, or ‘Cancel’ to 

cancel. 

• Once printing has started, you can cancel by 

pressing ENTER. 

Tip 

• Paper size and layout can be set; the options 

available depend on your printer — check the printer 

manual for details. 

• This recorder may not work correctly with all printers. 

1/84 

131 

En

13 

132 

En 

The Disc Setup menu 

Chapter 13 

The Disc Setup menu 

From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the 

contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure, 

initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is 

accessed from the Home menu. 

Basic settings 

Input Disc Name 

DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM 

When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder 

automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from 

DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name 

function to change the default disc name to something 

more descriptive. This name appears when you load the 

disc and when you display disc information on-screen. 


ENTER 

2 Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc Name’ > ‘Next 

Screen’. 

ENTER 

3 Input a name for the disc. 

The disc name can be up to 64 characters long for a VR 

mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD+R/+RW. 

• See Title Name on page 107 for more on navigating 

the input screen. 

Lock Disc 

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM 

Disc Setup 

Basic Input Input Disc Disc Name Name 

Next Screen 

Initialize 

Lock Disc 

Finalize 

Optimize HDD 

DVD-RW Auto Init. 

• Default setting: Off 

Locking the disc will prevent accidental recording, 

editing or erasing of the disc. 

Important 

•A locked disc can still be initialized (which will 

completely erase the disc). 


2 Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock Disc’ then ‘On’ or ‘Off’. 

Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or 

erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc 

to make edits, select Off. 

DVD-RW Auto Initialize 

DVD-RW 

• Default setting: VR Mode 

Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you 

insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired 

initialization mode before inserting a disc. 

See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 90 for detailed 

instructions. 

Initialize settings 

You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW disc for either 

VR mode or Video mode recording. 

The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be 

automatically initialized for recording according to the 

DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Disc Setup menu (see 

page 90). 

New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording 

when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize 

them for VR mode recording. 1 

Note 

1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also, once recorded in Video mode, 

the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording. 

ENTER 

Disc Setup 

Basic Input Disc Name 

On 

Initialize 

Lock Disc 

Off 

Finalize 

Optimize HDD 

DVD-RW Auto Init. 

DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM

The Disc Setup menu 13 

DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized as 

a way of erasing the entire disc. When initializing a DVD 

-RAM disc, select VR mode. 

See Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 89 for 

detailed instructions. 

Finalize settings 

Finalize 

DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW 

Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc 

can be played on a regular DVD player or computer 

equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. 

It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs. This is only 

necessary if you want to a player to display a title menu 

for the disc. 

See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on 

page 88 for detailed instructions. 

Undo Finalize 

DVD-RW 

You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded 

on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you 

want to record more material or edit material already on 

the disc. 

You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs 

which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If 

when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be 

recorded. Undo the finalization. is displayed, use this 

command to be able to record on the disc using this 

recorder. 


ENTER 

2 Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo Finalize’ then 

‘Start’. 

Optimize HDD 

HDD 

As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file 

system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the 

HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented 

files. 

When the HDD needs optimizing the recorder will 

automatically display a message recommending 

optimization. 

Important 

• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours. 

During optimization, playback and recording are not 

possible. 

• Cancelling optimization mid-way does not undo the 

optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly 

optimized. 


ENTER 

2 Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then ‘Start’. 

Disc Setup 

Basic 

Initialize 

Finalize 

Optimize HDD 

A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go. If no 

actions are carried out for more than 20 minutes after the 

optimization process is completed, the unit turns itself 

off. 

Initialize HDD 

HDD 

Optimize HDD 

When your HDD/DVD recorder is working without a 

problem this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu. 

However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for 

some reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the 

problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the 

data on it. 


ENTER 

2 Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then ‘Start’. 

Disc Setup 

Basic 

Initialize 

Finalize 

Optimize Initialize Optimize HDD 

Initialize HDD 

Start 

Start 

133 

En

14 

134 

En 

The Video Adjust menu 

Chapter 14 


Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture 

quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc 

playback, and for recording. 

Setting the picture quality for TV and 

external inputs 

Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality 

settings for the built-in TV tuner 1 and for each external 

input. There are several preset settings that suit various 

sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets. 

Choosing a preset 

1 HOME MENU With the recorder stopped, press to 

display the Home Menu. 

ENTER 

2 Select ‘Video Adjust’. 

ENTER 

3 Select a preset. 

Tuner 

Detailed Settings 

• Use the VIDEO IN button to switch between the builtin 

TV tuner and the external inputs. 

• Use the Smart Jog to change the channel of the 

built-in TV tuner. 

There are six presets available: 

• Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts 

• VCR – suitable for video cassettes 

• DTV/LDP – suitable for digital broadcasts and 

Laserdiscs 

• Memory1 – user preset 1 



You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for 

the current preset (Tuner, VCR or DTV/LDP). 

Pr 1 

Creating your own set 

There are three user presets in which you can save your 

own set of picture quality settings. 

1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of 

the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 

2 Select ‘Detailed Settings’. 

3 Select the setting you want to adjust. 

You can adjust the following settings: 

• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture 

quality when video output is set to progressive. 

• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for 

film material when the video output is set to 

progressive. Usually set to Auto; but try switching to 

Off if the picture appears unnatural. 

• 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/colour separation. 

• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) 

applied to the Y (brightness) component. 

• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) 

applied to the C (colour) component. 

• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear. 

• White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level 

adjustment. 

• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white. 

Note 

1 When the Component Video Out (see page 139) is set to Interlace, the settings for the digital tuner cannot be changed. 

ENTER 

ENTER 

Memory1 

Prog. Motion 

PureCinma 

3-D Y/C 

YNR 

CNR 

Detail 

Memory1 


Pr 1 

Motion Still 

Auto 

Motion Still 

Off 

Max 

Off 

Max 

Off 

Max 

White AGC Off 

Pr 1

The Video Adjust menu 14 

• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black. 

• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black 

level (525 Input Line System only). 

• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and green. 

• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours appear. 

ENTER 

4 Adjust the currently selected setting. 

5 HOME MENU Press to exit. 

You can now use the preset for any other input or the 

built-in TV tuner. 

Tip 

• To see more of the picture as you adjust different 

settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you 

want to adjust. 

Setting the picture quality for disc 

playback 

This setting determines how the picture will look when 

playing discs. 

Choosing a preset 

1 HOME MENU With a disc playing (or paused), press to 

display the Home Menu. 

ENTER 

2 Select ‘Video Adjust’. 

ENTER 

3 Select a setting. 

TV 


There are six presets available: 

• TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray tube TVs 

• PDP – suitable for plasma display screens 

• Professional – suitable for professional monitors 




You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for 

the current preset (TV, PDP or Professional). 

Creating your own set 

There are three user presets in which you can save your 

own set of picture quality settings for disc playback. 

1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of 

the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 

2 Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed 

Settings’. 

Memory1 


135 

En

14 

136 

En 


3 Select the picture quality setting you want to 

adjust. 

Memory1 

Prog. Motion 

PureCinma 

YNR 

BNR 

MNR 

Sharpness 

Detail 

Motion Still 

Auto1 

Off Max 

Off 

Off 

Soft 

Soft 

You can adjust the following settings: 

• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture 

quality when video output is set to progressive. (Prog. 

Motion is ineffective when PureCinema is On.) 

• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for 

film material when the video output is set to 

progressive. Usually set to Auto 1 but try switching 

to Auto 2, On or Off if the picture appears unnatural. 

• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) 

applied to the Y (brightness) component. 

• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) 

applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of 

flat colour, caused by MPEG compression). 

• MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) 

applied to the mosquito noise (artefacts visible 

around the edges of an image, caused by MPEG 

compression). 

• Sharpness – Adjusts the sharpness of the highfrequency 

(detailed) elements in the picture. 

Sharpness is ineffective for HDMI output. 

• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear. 

• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white. White 

Level is ineffective for HDMI output. 

• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black. Black 

Level is ineffective for HDMI output. 

• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black 

level. Black Setup is ineffective for HDMI output. 

• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of 

darker images. Gamma Correction is ineffective for 

HDMI output. 

• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and 

green. Hue is ineffective for HDMI output. 

• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours 

appear. Chroma Level is ineffective for HDMI output. 

Max 

Max 

Fine 

Fine 

4 Use the / buttons to adjust the currently 

selected picture quality setting. 

5 When you have all the settings as you want 

them, press HOME MENU to exit. 

Tip 

• To see more of the picture as you adjust different 

settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you 

want to adjust.

The Initial Setup menu 15 

Chapter 15 

The Initial Setup menu 

Using the Initial Setup menu 

The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on. 

Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are 

grayed out in the Initial Setup menu. 

Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity. 

• Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’. 

In the table below, the default option is marked with a •. 

Setting 

Basic 

Options Explanation 

Clock Setting Auto Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set 

automatically. 

Manual • If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you can set 

the time and date manually. 

• If any digital TV channels are set then the clock will automatically be set. 

• The clock must be set in order to use timer recording. 

Input Line System 525 System Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external input. 

625 System • Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording. 

• This setting is applicable only when recording from an external input. 

• See also About the input line system on page 146 for more information on this setting. 

Power Save Mode 1 Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the antenna 

output when the recorder is in standby. 

Mode 2 No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is in 

standby. 

Off • When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving at the SCART and 

antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs. 

HELP Setting On • Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. 

Off Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press HELP on 

the remote to manually display the Help screen.) 

EPG Type Select GUIDE Plus+ Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG. 

Digital EPG Use the EPG based on information provided by D.TV broadcasts. 

Setup Navigator Start Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switching on and setting up on 

page 56. 

Digital Tuner 

Replace Channels Next Screen Scans for digital channels and replaces all the channel presets with the 

results. Before the scan starts you will need to select your country. 

After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels 

were found, and if so, how many. 

(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or 

RETURN/EXIT. In this case, no channels are set.) 

If you execute a Replace Channels command, any timer recordings set for D.TV channels will be erased. 

137 

En

15 

138 

En 


Setting Options Explanation 

Add New Channels Next Screen Automatically scans for new digital channels. 

After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels 

were found, and if so, how many. 

(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or 

RETURN/EXIT. In this case, no new channels are set.) 

Channel Sort Next Screen Use this screen to sort channel presets into your prefered order. Use the 

/// buttons to highlight the channel you want to move, press 

ENTER. Use the cursor buttons again to highlight the position you want to 

move the channel preset to, then press ENTER again. 

(If there are more channel presets than will fit on one screen, you can select 

the next/previous page by highlighting the small triangular marks and 

pressing ENTER.) 

Channel Options Next Screen From this screen you can skip or lock channels. Locked channels will require 

the correct password to be entered before the channel can be watched. Use 

the /// buttons to highlight a preference box and press ENTER to 

toggle the preference. 

To enter this screen, input the parental lock password when prompted (if one 

has not yet been set then the password you enter becomes the parental lock 

password). 

Auto Skip Off • No channels are automatically skipped. 

Radio Radio channels are skipped when selecting channels. 

Data Data channels are skipped when selecting channels. 

Radio & Data Radio and data channels are skipped when selecting channels. 

Signal Check Next Screen Use this screen to check the signal level and quality of digital channels. Use 

the / buttons to change the RF channel; select Add New Channels 

then press ENTER to scan for new channels; press HOME MENU to exit. 

Aerial Power On Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) when this recorder is on 

or in standby. 

Auto Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) only when this recorder 

is on. 

Off • This recorder does not supply power to the connected aerial (antenna). 

• If the setting keeps reverting to Off when you try to set to On or Auto, the aerial may not be connected properly, or it may be shorted. In either 

case, check the connection and try making the setting again. 

D.TV Language Next Screen From this screen you can set your Primary and Secondary Audio preference 

for multilingual digital broadcasts, your Primary and Secondary Subtitle 

preference for programmes that are broadcast with subtitles, and your 

Teletext language preference. Use the / buttons to highlight a field then 

use the / buttons to change it.



Analog Tuner 

Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan Select your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into channels 

in your area. After auto scan has finished, the channel mapping screen 

appears showing which channels have been assigned to which programme 

numbers. You can skip unwanted channels using the Manual CH Setting 

option below. 

Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping screen. 

Download from TV If your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that your 

TV is tuned to via the SCART input. Select your country and then wait for the 

download to complete. After the download is complete, the channel 

mapping screen appears, as above. 

See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more 

information. 

Manual CH Setting Next Screen Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made by 

auto tuning. Select your country, then proceed to the manual channel 

setting screen: 

• Change channel presets using the Smart Jog. 

• To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that 

channel), change the Skip setting to On. 

• Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel system of your country 

or region. 

• Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want to assign to the current 

channel preset. 

• To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off then 

adjust the Level setting. 

• Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region. 

• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters for the 

current channel preset. 

• If the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder 

connected to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER), set the Decoder setting to On. 

Channel Swapping Next Screen Proceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different presets 

so that you can group together presets that naturally go together. Select two 

presets to swap then press ENTER. 

Video In/Out 

Input Colour System Next Screen Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external 

input and the built-in TV tuner. Use the Smart Jog or VIDEO IN buttons to 

change the preset or external input. On the default Auto setting the recorder 

can generally correctly detect whether the input signal is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 

NTSC or PAL-60, but in some cases you may have to set it manually if the 

picture is displayed incorrectly. 

• Input Colour System cannot be set when the recorder is in D.TV mode. 

• See also About the input colour system on page 146 for more information on this setting. 

Component Video 

Out 

Interlace • Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video. 

Progressive Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the 

operating instructions that came with your monitor/TV if you’re not sure. 

• For Component Video Out to be effective, the AV1 Out setting (see page 140) must be set to something other than RGB. 

• If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive, you will not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, 

press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen Resolution on 

page 144 to the default setting). 

• When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT. 

139 

En

15 

140 

En 



AV1 Out Video • Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to standard composite video 

(compatible with all TVs). 

S-Video Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to S-video. Recommended if you are 

using a long SCART cable. 

RGB Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to RGB. Good quality but check your 

TV for compatibility. Note that on this setting signals from the built-in tuner 

and from external inputs is not output when the recorder is in TV mode. 

• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case either switch off and reconnect 

using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 161). 

• The Component Video Out setting (see page 139) has no effect when AV1 Out is set to RGB. 

• When the HDMI signal is output, the AV1 Out outputs the composite video signal even when it is set to RGB. 

AV2/L1 In Video • Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to standard composite 

video. 

S-Video Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to S-video. 

RGB Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to RGB. 

Decoder Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) 

SCART connector. For scrambled channels, make sure that the channel 

Decoder setting is set to On. (See Manual CH Setting on page 139.) 

NTSC on PAL TV On • NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs. 

Off Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible. 

Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with 

your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 146 for related information. 

Audio In 

NICAM Select NICAM • Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. 

Regular Audio Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (You can still switch 

the audio to record using the AUDIO button before recording.) 

Analog Tuner Level Normal • Standard setting. 

Compression Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing distortion. 

External Audio Stereo • Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard 

stereo. 

Bilingual Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack. 

When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or 

bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here. 

Bilingual Recording A/L • Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to HDD 

with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD-R/-RW (Video 

mode) or DVD+R/+RW or in LPCM mode, from an external source. 

B/R As above, but for right (B) channel recording. 

When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except 

in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback. 

DV Input Stereo 1 • Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot) from a 

camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks. 

Stereo 2 Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports 

two stereo audio tracks. 

Mix Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio tracks.


Setting 

Audio Out 

Options Explanation 

Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital • Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played. 

Dolby Digital Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected 

PCM 

equipment doesn’t have a Dolby Digital decoder. 

DTS Out On • Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played. 

Off Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use when 

your connected equipment doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the 

analog audio outputs. 

96 kHz PCM Out 96 kHz 48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your connected 

equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate. 

96 kHz Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played. 

MPEG Out MPEG Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is being 

played. 

MPEG PCM • Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your 

connected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder. 

Audio DRC On Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control). Use when listening to 

Dolby Digital material at low volume. 

Off • Switches off Audio DRC. 

Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the 

dynamic range from the receiver subwoofer — see Dynamic Range Control on page 32. 

Language 

OSD Language English • Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English. 

available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on-screen displays. 

On Screen Display and D.TV Language will both reflect this setting. 

Audio Language English • Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English. 

available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language for 

DVD-Video playback. 

Other Select to set the default audio language to something other than the ones 

listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 147. 

Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference. 

Subtitle Language English • Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English. 

available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language for 

DVD-Video playback. 

Other Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones 


Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference. 

141 

En

15 

142 

En 



Auto Language On • On this setting: 

• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language will 

play using that language, without subtitles. 

• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but that have 

a subtitle track in your default language will play the original audio track with 

subtitles. 

Off Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle 

language preferences. 

For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language. 

DVD Menu Language w/Subtitle 

Language • 

Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the 

subtitle language. 

English Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English. 

available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for DVD 

-Video menus. 

Other Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones 


Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language. 

Subtitle Display On • Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language 

and Auto Language preferences. 

Off Select to switch off subtitle display. 

Assist Subtitle Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available. 

Some discs may override these settings. 

Recording 

Manual Recording On (go to setup) All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to MN32, LPCM and XP+ 

modes can be set. 

Off • Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP and SEP) can be set. 

See also Manual recording modes on page 151 for detailed information on manual recording levels. 

Optimized Rec On The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to fit on 

to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality setting. If the 

recording will not fit even at MN1(MN4 for DVD+R/+RW), then the 

recording will be made to the HDD in the original quality selected. 

Off • When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected media, the 

recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible. 

Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be used together with VPS/PDC. 

Subtitle Recording On The selected subtitle language is recorded with the D.TV timer recording. 

Off • No subtitles are recorded with D.TV timer recordings. 

Set Thumbnail 0 seconds • Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first frame of 

the title. 

Auto Chapter 

(HDD/VR) 

30 seconds Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title. 

3 minutes Sets the default thumbnail picture to three minutes into the title. 

On • When recording to the HDD or in VR mode to a DVD, chapter marks are 

added at the black screen between commercials and main programming. 

When recording in DV, chapter marks can be changed by date/time. 

Off Automatic chapter marking is switched off.



Auto Chapter (Video) No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off. 

10 minutes • When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10 

minutes. 

15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes. 

This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs. 

Auto Chapter No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off. 

(DVD+R/+RW) 

10 minutes • When recording in DVD+R/+RW or in real-time copying, chapter markers are 

inserted every 10 minutes. 

HDD Recording 

Format 

15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes. 

Video Mode Off Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if you 

don’t need to transfer the recording later to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or 

DVD+R/+RW. 

Video Mode On • Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode recordings. 

This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to a DVD-R/ 

-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW as high-speed copy can be used. 

• When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode 

Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 140. 

• When the recording mode is set to XP+, you cannot change HDD Recording Format. 

Playback 

TV Screen Size 4:3 (Letter Box) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format 

presentation for widescreen material. 

4:3 (Pan & Scan) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan 

presentation for widescreen material. 

16:9 • Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine how 4:3 

material will look. 

Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override 

this setting. 

Still Picture Field Produces a stable, generally shake-free image. 

Frame Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake. 

Auto • Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image. 

Seamless Playback On Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit 

points. 

Off • You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during playback of a 

VR mode Play List. 

This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback. 

Angle Indicator On • A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD-Video 

disc. 

Parental Lock 

Set Password / 

Change Password 

Off Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing. 

Next Screen If no password has yet been set, enter a four digit number to become your 

password. If you want to change the password, first enter your old password, 

then enter a new one. 

DVD Playback Next Screen From this screen, first enter your password and then set a parental lock level 

for playback of DVDs with parental level coding. 

143 

En

15 

144 

En 



D.TV Age Limit Next Screen Use this screen to enter an age limit for D.TV programmes. Programmes 

that are broadcast with age suitability guidelines that fall above the age set 

here will require the correct password to be entered before the channel can 

be viewed. 

You must also enter your password in order to change the age limit setting. 

This setting is only applicable when the country is set to France, Denmark, Finland or Sweden. 

HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected) 

Screen Resolution 1920 x 1080p Constant 1920 x 1080p output. 

1920 x 1080i Constant 1920 x 1080i output. 

1280 x 720p Constant 1280 x 720p output. 

720 x 576p 

(720 x 480p) 

720 x 576i 

(720 x 480i) 

Constant 720 x 576p output (when setting the Input Line System to 

525 System, video is output in 720 x 480p). 

Constant 720 x 576i output (when setting the Input Line System to 

525 System, video is output in 720 x 480i). 

• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE while 

holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 139 to the default 

setting). 

• If you have the Colour set to YCbCr 4:2:2, you cannot select 720 x 576i (720 x 480i). 

4:3 Video Output Full Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the aspect ratio. 

Normal Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change the aspect ratio. 4:3 

video will be shown with bars on each side. 

Colour RGB (0–255) Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’ on the RGB (16–235) 

setting. 

RGB (16–235) Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the black too deep on the 

RGB (0–255) setting. 

YCbCr 4:2:2 The video signal is output as a 10-bit YCbCr 4:2:2 component signal. This is 

the standard setting for HDMI-compatible devices. 

YCbCr 4:4:4 The video signal is output as a 8-bit YCbCr 4:4:4 component signal. 

• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available. 

• When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available. 

• You cannot choose YCbCr 4:2:2 when the Screen Resolution is set to 720 x 576i (720 x 480i). 

Audio Output Auto • Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a bitstream signal. 

However, depending on the Audio Out setting, number of audio channels, 

and the HDMI-connected device, Linear PCM audio may be output. 

PCM All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM (except DTS). 

Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with bitstream audio. 

This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected. 

Options 

On Screen Display On • The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play, etc.) on-screen. 

Off Switches off the on-screen operation displays. 

Front Panel Display On • The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby. 

Off The front panel display is switched off in standby.



Remote Control 

Mode 

Recorder 1–3 

(default: Recorder 1) 

If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to 

different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote 

controller ID, press and hold RETURN/EXIT then press 1, 2 or 3 to set. The 

remote will only control a recorder with the same ID. 

AV. Link This Recorder Only • Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby are 

not passed through to the AV output. 

Pass Through Signals received when in standby are passed though to the output for 

connected devices. (Note that during EPG data download, the EPG data is 

not passed through.) 

When set to Pass Through, make sure to set Power Save (page 137) to Off. 

DivX VOD Registration Code Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code. See DivX video 

compatibility and DivX® VOD content on page 46. 

Set Preview 

(HDD only) 

Quick Preview • When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video plays short excerpts from 

throughout the selected title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally 

from the beginning.) 

Normal The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title. 

CI Information Next Screen This option displays a menu of CI card functions. Consult your service 

provider for more information on the functions available. 

Software Update Next Screen The Software Update function can check for and download updated system 

software for the digital tuner. See Using Software Update (Digital tuner) on 

page 147. 

Options 2 

USB Restart USB Device If the connected USB device does not respond to the recorder, try using this 

option to restart it. If the device still does not work properly try switching it off 

then back on, and/or disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable. 

Confirm Printer Use this option to confirm the make and model of the printer connected to 

the recorder (does not work with all printers). 

Pause Live TV TV’s Tuner Allows you to use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Link-compatible TV 

connected by SCART cable. 

Recorder’s Tuner • Allows you to use Pause Live TV with this recorder’s internal TV tuner. 

See also Pause Live TV on page 84 for more information on this setting. 

HDD Sleep Mode Proceed Puts the HDD to sleep. Using this feature when playing DVDs or CDs allows 

you to reduce noise produced by the unit, resulting in improved sound 

quality. When you wake the HDD back up it will take a few seconds to load. 

The HDD can be taken out of Sleep Mode by any number of actions, 

including: 

• Turning the power off and on again. 

• Pressing the HDD/DVD button and choosing the HDD. 

• When a timer recording begins. 

• When you try and make any changes to system settings. 

145 

En

15 

146 

En 


Additional information about the TV system 

settings 

About the input line system 

This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC 

and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input 

Colour System settings determine how the recorder 

treats incoming video signals from an external input. 

Please note the following points when changing the 

input line system: 

• When the current input is a built-in tuner channel 

preset, changing the input line system will usually 

also affect the input line system of the 

AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) input. However if the 

AV2/L1 In setting is set to Decoder, then the L2 

input is affected instead. 

• If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the 

screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your 

TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the 

front panel (Stop) button then pressing 

INPUT SELECT (also front panel) while the recorder is 

stopped. 

• When you switch the Input Line System setting the 

Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the 

(Stop) button and INPUT SELECT buttons as 

described above, there is no confirmation, so please 

use with care. 

• You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems 

on the same disc. 

• When you change this setting, the Input Colour 

System setting also changes (see below). 

About NTSC on PAL TV 

Depending on the Input Line System setting and the 

NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when 

the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table 

below. 

Output when 

Input Line System NTSC on PAL TV 

stopped 

625 System Off PAL 

On PAL 

525 System Off NTSC 

On PAL–60 

About the input colour system 

The available options of the Input Colour System setting 

depend on the Input Line System setting. The table below 

shows the different options available. 

Built-in analog 

Input Line System External input 

tuner 

625 System Auto Auto 

PAL PAL 

SECAM SECAM 

525 System n/a Auto 

3.58 NTSC 

PAL–60 

Additional information about component 

video output 

If you switch the Component Video Out setting to 

Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible with 

progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see 

anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and 

hold the (Stop) button on the front panel, then press 

OPEN/CLOSE. This will set the recorder’s video output 

back to Interlace.


Selecting other languages for 

language options 

ENTER 

1 Select ‘Other’ from the language list. 

This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu 

Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language. 

ENTER 

2 Select the language you want. 

Initial Setup 

Basic 

Digital Tuner 

Analogue Tuner 

Video In/Out 

Audio In 

Language 

Audio Out 

Language 

Recording 

OSD DVD Menu Language 

Audio Language 

Language 

Subtitle Language 

English 

Auto Language Number 0 5 1 4 

DVD Menu Language 

Subtitle Display 

• Select by language name: Use the / buttons to 

change the language. 

• Select by code number: Press then use the number 

buttons to enter the four-digit language code. 

See Language code list on page 158 for a list of available 

languages and corresponding codes. 

Using Software Update (Digital tuner) 

The Software Update function can keep the built-in 

digital tuner up to date with the latest system software. 

You can either check for updates manually, or have the 

recorder do it automatically at regular intervals. 

Access the Software Update screen from the Options 

menu. 

There are three options available: Manual Update, Auto 

Update and Technical Information. 

Manual Update 

Select Manual Update to check for updated software 

immediately. If new software is found then it is 

automatically downloaded and installed. The new 

software will take effect the next time the recorder is 

powered on. 

If for some reason the new software could not be 

downloaded successfully, a dialog box informs you of the 

error. Press HOME MENU to exit or RETURN/EXIT to 

return to the previous screen. 

Note that channel information may be erased when 

software update is used, and that timer recording will not 

work during the update. 

To cancel manual update before it has completed, press 

HOME MENU. 

Auto Update 

By default, the Auto Update option is On, which means 

that periodically the recorder will check for and update 

the digital tuner software if it’s available. We recommend 

that you leave this option On. 

If new software is found and successfully downloaded, 

the recorder automatically scans for new digital 

channels, informing you if any are found (this is the 

equivalent of using the Add New Channel option, found 

in the Digital Tuner section of the Initial Setup menu). 

Technical Information 

This displays the current hardware and software version 

numbers of the digital tuner. 

147 

En

16 

148 

En 


Chapter 16 


Setting up the remote to control your TV 

You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be 

able to use this feature you first have to program the 

remote with a maker code from the table on the following 

page. 


2 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then 

enter the maker code for your TV. 

See the table on the next page for the list of maker codes. 

If there is more than one code given for your make, input 

the first one in the list. 

• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the 

table, you will not be able to use this remote to 

control your TV. 

3 Point the remote towards your TV and press 

TV to check that the remote works with your TV. 

If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch off. 

If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your 

maker, repeat step 1 with a new code. 

Using the TV remote control buttons 

The table below shows how to use this remote control 

with your TV. 

Button What it does 

TV Press to switch the TV on/off (standby) 

INPUT Press to change the TV’s video input 

VOLUME +/– Use to adjust the TV volume 

CHANNEL +/– Use to change TV channels


TV Preset code list 

Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the 

codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. 

Manufacturer Code(s) Manufacturer Code(s) Manufacturer Code(s) Manufacturer Code(s) 

ACURA 644 

ADMIRAL 631 

AIWA 660 

AKAI 632, 635, 642 

AKURA 641 

ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644 

AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647 

ANITECH 644 

ASA 645 

ASUKA 641 

AUDIOGONIC 607, 636 

BASIC LINE 641, 644 

BAUR 631, 607, 642 

BEKO 638 

BEON 607 

BLAUPUNKT 631 

BLUE SKY 641 

BLUE STAR 618 

BPL 618 

BRANDT 636 

BTC 641 

BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656 

CASCADE 644 

CATHAY 607 

CENTURION 607 

CGB 642 

CIMLINE 644 

CLARIVOX 607 

CLATRONIC 638 

CONDOR 638 

CONTEC 644 

CROSLEY 632 

CROWN 638, 644 

CRYSTAL 642 

CYBERTRON 641 

DAEWOO 607, 644, 656 

DAINICHI 641 

DANSAI 607 

DAYTON 644 

DECCA 607, 648 

DIXI 607, 644 

DUMONT 653 

ELIN 607 

ELITE 641 

ELTA 644 

EMERSON 642 

ERRES 607 

FERGUSON 607, 636, 651 

FINLANDIA 635, 643 

FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653, 654 

FIRSTLINE 640, 644 

FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645 

FORMENTI 632, 607, 642 

FRONTECH 631, 642, 646 

FRONTECH/PROTECH 632 

FUJITSU 648, 629 

FUNAI 640, 646, 658 

GBC 632, 642 

GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618 

GEC 607, 634, 648 

GELOSO 632, 644 

GENEXXA 631, 641 

GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650 

GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656 

GORENJE 638 

GPM 641 

GRAETZ 631, 642 

GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648 

GRADIENTE 630 

GRANDIN 618 

GRUNDIG 631, 653 

HANSEATIC 607, 642 

HCM 618, 644 

HINARI 607, 641, 644 

HISAWA 618 

HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 

654, 606, 610, 624, 625, 618 

HUANYU 656 

HYPSON 607, 618, 646 

ICE 646, 647 

IMPERIAL 638, 642 

INDIANA 607 

INGELEN 631 

INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642 

INTERVISION 646, 649 

ISUKAI 641 

ITC 642 

ITT 631, 632, 642 

JEC 605 

JVC 613, 623 

KAISUI 618, 641, 644 

KAPSCH 631 

KENDO 642 

KENNEDY 632, 642 

KORPEL 607 

KOYODA 644 

LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648 

LIESENK&TTER 607 

LOEWE 607 

LUXOR 632, 642, 643 

M-ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 

656, 607, 636, 651 

MAGNADYNE 632, 649 

MAGNAFON 649 

MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629 

MANESTH 639, 646 

MARANTZ 607 

MARK 607 

MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 

647, 648 

MCMICHAEL 634 

MEDIATOR 607 

MEMOREX 644 

METZ 631 

MINERVA 631, 653 

MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631 

MULTITECH 644, 649 

NEC 659 

NECKERMANN 631, 607 

NEI 607, 642 

NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648 

NOBLIKO 649 

NOKIA 632, 642, 652 

NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652 

OCEANIC 631, 632, 642 

ORION 632, 607, 639, 640 

OSAKI 641, 646, 648 

OSO 641 

OSUME 648 

OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642 

PALLADIUM 638 

PANAMA 646 

PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622 

PATHO CINEMA 642 

PAUSA 644 

PHILCO 632, 642 

PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656, 668 

PHOENIX 632 

PHONOLA 607 

PROFEX 642, 644 

PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649 

QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653 

R-LINE 607 

RADIOLA 607 

RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602 

RBM 653 

RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 

661, 662, 609 

REDIFFUSION 632, 642 

REX 631, 646 

ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646 

SABA 631, 636, 642, 651 

SAISHO 639, 644, 646 

SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643 

SAMBERS 649 

SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646, 669, 670 

SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614 

SBR 607, 634 

SCHAUB LORENZ 642 

SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647 

SEG 642, 646 

SEI 632, 640, 649 

SELECO 631, 642 

SHARP 602, 619, 627, 667 

SIAREM 632, 649 

SIEMENS 631 

SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649 

SKANTIC 643 

SOLAVOX 631 

SONOKO 607, 644 

SONOLOR 631, 635 

SONTEC 607 

SONY 604 

SOUNDWAVE 607 

STANDARD 641, 644 

STERN 631 

SUSUMU 641 

SYSLINE 607 

TANDY 631, 641, 648 

TASHIKO 634 

TATUNG 607, 648 

TEC 642 

TELEAVIA 636 

TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652 

TELETECH 644 

TENSAI 640, 641 

THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663 

THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648 

TOMASHI 618 

TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653 

TOWADA 642 

ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649 

UNIDEN 671 

UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 

646, 654 

VESTEL 607 

VICTOR 613 

VOXSON 631 

WALTHAM 643 

WATSON 607 

WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649 

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607 

YOKO 607, 642, 646 

ZENITH 603, 620 

PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 

651 

149 

En

16 

150 

En 


Minimum copying times 

The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video. 

Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. 1 Check with the disc manufacturer for 

compatibility. 

Rec mode 

SEP SLP EP LP SP XP 

DVD disc type 10 h 8 h 6 h 4 h 2 h 1 h 

DVD-R / 1x 

DVD-RW / 1x 

DVD-RW / 2x 

1x 6 mins. 7.5 mins. 10 mins. 15 mins. 30 mins. 60 mins. 

DVD-R DL 

DVD-RAM / 2x 

DVD+R / 2.4x 

2x 3 mins. 4 mins. 5 mins. 7.5 mins. 15 mins. 30 mins. 

DVD+RW / 2.4x 

DVD+R DL 

2.4x *1 *1 *1 6.3 mins. 12.5 mins. 25 mins. 

DVD-RAM / 3x 

DVD-RAM / 5x 3x 2 mins. 2.5 mins. 3.5 mins. 5 mins. 10 mins. 20 mins. 

DVD-R / 4x 

DVD-RW / 4x 

DVD+R / 4x 

DVD+RW / 4x 

DVD-R / 8x / 16x 

DVD+R / 8x / 16x 

DVD-RW / 6x 

DVD+RW / 8x 

4x 1.5 mins.*1 2 mins.*1 2.5 mins.*1 4 mins. 7.5 mins. 15 mins. 

6x 1.25 mins.*1 1.6 mins.*1 2.2 mins.*1 3 mins. 5.5 mins. 11 mins. 

Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded. 

*1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied. 

Note 

1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may be made at 2x speed).


Manual recording modes 

The table below shows the approximate recording times for different DVD types in each manual recording mode, as 

well as the standard recording mode equivalents. For recording time on the HDD, see Specifications (DVR-LX60D) on 

page 162. 

Rec. time *1 Resolution *2 

Level 

Single-Layer 

DVD: 

DVD-R/-RW 

DVD+R/+RW 

DVD-RAM 

Dual-Layer 

DVD: 

DVD-R DL 

DVD+R DL 

Video mode Off (HDD) 

VR mode (DVD-R/-RW) 

DVD-RAM 

VR mode (DVD-R DL) 

MN 1 *3,4 802 mins. 1440 mins. 

*3,4 

MN 2 720 mins. 1292 mins. 

MN 3 *3,4 SEP 600 mins. 1077 mins. 

352 x 240 / 

*4 

MN 4 SLP 480 mins. 861 mins. 352 x 288 

*4 

MN 5 420 mins. 754 mins. 

MN 6 *4 EP 360 mins. 646 mins. 

MN 7 300 mins. 538 mins. 352 x 480 / 

MN 8 270 mins. 484 mins. 352 x 576 

MN 9 LP 240 mins. 431 mins. 

MN 10 230 mins. 413 mins. 

MN 11 220 mins. 395 mins. 

MN 12 210 mins. 377 mins. 

MN 13 200 mins. 359 mins. 

MN 14 190 mins. 341 mins. 

MN 15 180 mins. 323 mins. 

MN 16 170 mins. 305 mins. 

MN 17 160 mins. 287 mins. 

MN 18 150 mins. 269 mins. 

MN 19 140 mins. 251 mins. 

MN 20 130 mins. 233 mins. 

MN 21 SP 120 mins. 215 mins. 

MN 22 110 mins. 197 mins. 

MN 23 105 mins. 188 mins. 

MN 24 100 mins. 179 mins. 








MN 32 XP 61 mins. 111 mins. 

LPCM 61 mins. 111 mins. 

*5 

XP+ --- mins. --- mins. 

480 x 480 / 

480 x 576 

544 x 480 / 

544 x 576 

720 x 480 / 

720 x 576 

Video mode On (HDD) 

Video mode (DVD-R/-RW) 

DVD+R/+RW 

Video mode (DVD-R DL) 

DVD+R DL 

352 x 240 / 

352 x 288 

352 x 480 / 

352 x 576 

720 x 480 / 

720 x 576 

*1 Recording time may be slightly shorter for certain disc types or recording modes. 

*2 The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System. 

*3 

Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW. 

*4 Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW. 

*5 

XP+ mode is available for HDD recordings only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be automatically recorded in MN32 mode. 

• Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality. 

• Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in Linear PCM format. 

• See also Recording on page 79. 

151 

En

16 

152 

En 


Troubleshooting 

Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this 

component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the 

other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the 

points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. 

General 


The disc is automatically 

ejected after closing the 

disc tray 

• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 44). 

• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). 

• Take out the disc and clean it (page 160). 

• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder. 

Can’t eject a disc • Turn off the power to this device and press and hold OPEN/CLOSE on the front of the 

recorder for more than three seconds. 

Can’t play a disc • Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 44). 

• Take out the disc and clean it (page 160). 

• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). 

• Press HDD/DVD to select the DVD. 

• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the 

condensation to evaporate. 

• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System different 

to the current recorder setting. 

• DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy-once protected recordings 

will not play in this recorder. 

Can’t record a disc • Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 44). 

• Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been initialized (page 89). This 

can take up to an hour. 

Remote control does not 

work 

• If you connected this recorder to the receiver subwoofer using the CONTROL IN jack, point 

the remote control at the display unit of the receiver subwoofer to use (page 48). 

• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 145). (When the 

batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.) 

• Use the remote within its operating range (page 20). 

• Replace the batteries (page 21). 

No picture • Check that everything is connected properly (page 48). 

• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct input. 

• The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible TV. Reset to interlace by 

pressing and holding the front panel (Stop) button then pressing OPEN/CLOSE. 

• If you are using an indoor antenna that requires power, make sure that Aerial Power in the 

Initial Setup menu is set to On or Auto (page 138). 

• If the aerial/antenna is not connected properly, or if it is shorted, the Aerial Power setting 

will revert to Off automatically. Check the aerial connection and try making the setting again. 

• When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT. 

All settings are reset • If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the 

settings will be lost. 

• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord.



No sound or sound is 

distorted 

Cannot switch a bilingual 

programme 

The picture from the 

external input is distorted 

• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up. 

• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play. 

Press PLAY to resume regular playback. 

• DTS audio can only be played back if the recorder’s digital output is connected to the 

receiver subwoofer. If connected to your TV, your TV must have a DTS decoder for you to be 

able to enjoy DTS sound. 

• Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. 

• Check the audio cable connections (page 48). 

• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs. 

• During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels. The main and sub 

channels are both output. 

• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via 

this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV. 

The picture is distorted • Change the Input Line System setting (page 146). (You can also change it by pressing the 

(Stop) button and INPUT SELECT on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder 

stopped.) 

Screen is stretched 

vertically or horizontally 

Audio/subtitle language 

cannot be changed 

Can’t play a disc recorded 

using this recorder on 

another player 

• Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 143) is correct for the kind of TV you have 

(see also page 159). 

• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings. 

• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal. 

When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the 

connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video. 

• Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be changed during the recording of a 

digital broadcast. 

• You can only use the audio track and subtitles for the language that were selected at the 

time of recording a digital broadcast. The audio track and subtitles cannot be changed to 

other languages. 

• If the disc was recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, make sure that it’s 

finalized (page 88). 

• Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video 

mode) or DVD+R and finalized. 

• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW compatible 

in order to play it (page 43). 

• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM compatible 

players (page 80). 

• DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material may not play on other 

players. Finalize the disc and try again. 

During playback the • When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display correctly. 

picture is dark or distorted Connect the recorder directly to your TV. 

Recorded contents are not 

clear or artefacts appear in 

areas of flat colour (due to 

MPEG compression; also 

known as block noise) 

• Change the recording mode to XP/SP. 

153 

En

16 

154 

En 



Can’t record or does not 

record successfully 

Timer programme doesn’t 

record successfully 

After briefly unplugging 

or after a power failure 

the front panel display 

shows ‘--:--’ 

Front panel display shows 

‘LOCKED’ when a button is 

pressed 

Can’t use One Touch Copy 

(HDD to DVD) 

Can’t use One Touch Copy 

(DVD to HDD) 

• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD. 

• For a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t already finalized. 

• Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc: 

– HDD: 999 titles 

– VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc 

– Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title 

– DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254 chapters per disc) 

• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected. 

• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 132). 

• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has 

already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system. When 

recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what 

you want to record (page 146). 

• The power may have failed during recording. 

• When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV tuner, not 

the TV’s built-in tuner. 

• When recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, programmes that are 

copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once 

material (page 80). 

• Two timer programmes may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record 

completely. 

• The power may have failed during recording. 

• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset 

when there is no power to the recorder. After unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps 

all settings for a period of several minutes. Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use 

the recorder again. 

• To have the battery replaced, please ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or 

your dealer to carry out repairs. 

• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 87). 

• Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some free space for recording 

and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a DVD-R/-RW (Video 

mode) or a DVD+R, the disc isn’t finalized. 

• Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some free space for recording 

and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc. 

• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of remaining recordable titles 

may not decrease. 

• Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that there isn’t a disc menu 

on the disc you’re trying to use. 

• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One Touch Copy 

will not work. 

• If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP+ mode, the One Touch Copy 

feature can’t be used. 

• One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over eight hours long when copying to DVD+R/ 

+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL). 

• One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles when copying to 

DVD+R/+RW. 

• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD. 

• Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 999 titles 

on the HDD. 

• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.



The device connected to 

the USB port is not 

recognized 

File names are not 

displayed properly. 

HDMI 


The connected HDMI or 

DVI device does not 

display any picture (and 

the front panel HDMI 

indicator does not light) 

No video from the HDMI 

output 

There’s no sound from the 

connected HDMI or DVI 

device 

• Check that the device is compatible with this recorder (page 55). 

• Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length. 

• Check that the USB cable is inserted fully. 

• Check that the USB device is powered on. 

• Try switching this recorder into standby mode and then back on. 

• Try using the Restart USB Device option from the Initial Setup menu (page 145). 

• If several USB devices (camera, USB memory, card reader, etc.) are connected at the same 

time, it’s possible that only the first device connected to this recorder will be recognized. 

• Files names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may not display correctly on 

this unit. 

• Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the power of both components 

is on). 

• Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on. 

• Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next, switch on the HDMI/DVI 

device and leave it for around 30 seconds, then switch on this recorder. 

• When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the following: 

– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this recorder. 

– The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a non-standard cable may result in 

no picture being output. 

– Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single cable to connect devices 

together. 

• When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the following: 

– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this recorder. 

– The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible. 

– The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) 

and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) video input. 

• If the recorder’s internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no HDMI output. 

• Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder. 

• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at 

all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to 

switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 139 to the default setting). 

• There is no sound when using a DVI terminal. 

• Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with the manual that came 

with the connected device). 

If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the 

outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. 

If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working 

• Press (Stop) then try restarting playback. 

• Press the front panel STANDBY/ON button to 

switch the power off, then switch back on and restart 

playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and 

hold STANDBY/ON for five seconds until the 

power switches off. 

STANDBY/ON 

HDD/DVD 

A.TV D.TV PLTV DivX COPY 


USB 


CH 

OPEN/CLOSE 

STOP REC 

INPUT 

SELECT 

155 

En

16 

156 

En 


On-screen displays 

The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation 

of their meaning. 

Message Explanation/Action 

• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment. When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder 

automatically initializes it. 

• Incompatible region number. The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder 

and so will not play. 

• Cannot record any more titles. 

• No more space for file management data. 

• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the 

finalization. 

• Cannot play this disc. 

• This disc cannot be recorded. 

• Cannot read the CPRM information. 

• Could not record the information to the disc. 

• Cannot edit. 

• Could not initialize disc. 

• Could not complete finalization successfully. 

• Could not undo finalization successfully. 

• Could not successfully unlock the disc. 

The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum 

number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/ 

chapters or combine chapters. 

The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the 

finalization in order to recording/editing. 

The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and 

retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even 

with a new disc, please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service 

center or your dealer to carry out repairs. 

• Incompatible or unreadable disc. The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This display may also 

appear if the disc is dirty or damaged. 

• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM 

compatible. 

• Cannot record this content using Video 

mode recording. 

• This video cannot be recorded to DVD+R/+RW. 

The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW 

disc with CPRM for recording. 

• This content is copy protected. The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded. 

• Incorrect CPRM information. The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder 

may be damaged — please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized 

service center or your dealer to carry out repairs. 

• Repairing disc. 

• Repairing the HDD. 

During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the 

power is restored. 

• Could not repair the disc. The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The 

contents of the recording will be lost. 

• Overheating has stopped operation. Press 

DISPLAY to clear message. 

• HDD optimization is recommended. This can 

be done using Disc Setup. 

• Please perform HDD optimization. This can 

be done using Disc Setup. 

The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating 

limit. If this message reappears, please ask your nearest Pioneerauthorized 

service center or your dealer to carry out repairs. 

The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to 

maintain playback and recording performance. 

The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to maintain 

performance.



• The HDD has not been sufficiently 

optimized. Please optimize again. 

• An error occurred. Please consult the service 

center. Note that contents on the HDD may be 

erased when servicing this unit. 

• The Hard Disk Drive info is incorrect. Use the 

Disc Setup menu to reinitialize. 

• This signal’s TV system is different from the 

recorder’s setting. 

• Recording failed due to a TV system 

mismatch. Press DISPLAY to clear message. 

• Playback has stopped because the TV system 

is different than the recording. 

• You are not allowed to watch this 

Conditional Access Programme. 

• There is no DV input or the input signal is 

unrecordable. 

If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is 

likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for 

optimization to complete properly. Please erase some titles from the 

HDD and optimize again. 

This message is displayed when information from the HDD cannot 

be read. The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your 

nearest Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out 

repairs. 

As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be 

made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 133) may result in your being 

able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will 

erase all recorded contents, including protected files. 

The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different 

from the TV system settings of this recorder. 

The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set 

for recording was different from the setting of the recorder. 

During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL, 

NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to stop 

automatically. 

A CA module or smart card (obtained from your service provider) is 

required to watch the selected programme. Insert the supplied 

module or card into the Common Interface card slot on the front 

panel of the recorder (page 17). 

No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a blank 

section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder. 

• No DV camcorder connected. The camcorder is not connected properly, or the camcorder is 

switched off. 

• You cannot connect more than one DV 

camcorder at a time. 

This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to just one camcorder. 

• Cannot operate the DV camcorder. This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder. Try switching off the 

camcorder then turn it back on again. 

• Could not operate the DV camcorder. This recorder was not able to operate the DV camcorder. 

• The DV camcorder is not set for playback. 

Please select playback mode on the DV 

camcorder. 

• The printer is not ready or is not connected. 

Please check the printer. 

The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to playback mode. 

This message is displayed when communication could not be 

established with the printer. See the Troubleshooting section if you 

do not know the cause. 

• Printing has been cancelled because ... This message is displayed when there is a printer error during 

printing. After checking the printer for the cause of the error, either 

reconnect the printer and start the printing job again, or select “Yes” 

to resume printing (select “No” to cancel the print job). See also the 

operating instructions that came with your printer for possible 

causes of print errors. 

157 

En

16 

158 

En 


Front-panel displays 

The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation 

of their meaning. 


• E01 The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest 

Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs. 

• E02 As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be 

made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 133) may result in your being 

able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will 

erase all recorded contents, including protected files. 

Language code list 

Language (Language code letter), Language code 

Japanese (ja), 1001 

English (en), 0514 

French (fr), 0618 

German (de), 0405 

Italian (it), 0920 

Spanish (es), 0519 

Chinese (zh), 2608 

Dutch (nl), 1412 

Portuguese (pt), 1620 

Swedish (sv), 1922 

Russian (ru), 1821 

Greek (el), 0512 

Polish (pl), 1612 

Czech (cs), 0319 

Norwegian (no), 1415 

Afar (aa), 0101 

Abkhazian (ab), 0102 

Afrikaans (af), 0106 

Amharic (am), 0113 

Arabic (ar), 0118 

Assamese (as), 0119 

Aymara (ay), 0125 

Azerbaijani (az), 0126 

Bashkir (ba), 0201 

Byelorussian (be), 0205 

Bulgarian (bg), 0207 

Bihari (bh), 0208 

Bislama (bi), 0209 

Bengali (bn), 0214 

Tibetan (bo), 0215 

Breton (br), 0218 

Catalan (ca), 0301 

Corsican (co), 0315 

Welsh (cy), 0325 

Danish (da), 0401 

Bhutani (dz), 0426 

Esperanto (eo), 0515 

Estonian (et), 0520 

Basque (eu), 0521 

Persian (fa), 0601 

Finnish (fi), 0609 

Fiji (fj), 0610 

Faroese (fo), 0615 

Frisian (fy), 0625 

Irish (ga), 0701 

Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 

Galician (gl), 0712 

Guarani (gn), 0714 

Gujarati (gu), 0721 

Hausa (ha), 0801 

Hindi (hi), 0809 

Croatian (hr), 0818 

Hungarian (hu), 0821 

Armenian (hy), 0825 

Interlingua (ia), 0901 

Interlingue (ie), 0905 

Inupiak (ik), 0911 

Indonesian (in), 0914 

Icelandic (is), 0919 

Hebrew (iw), 0923 

Yiddish (ji), 1009 

Javanese (jw), 1023 

Georgian (ka), 1101 

Kazakh (kk), 1111 

Greenlandic (kl), 1112 

Cambodian (km), 1113 

Kannada (kn), 1114 

Korean (ko), 1115 

Kashmiri (ks), 1119 

Kurdish (ku), 1121 

Kirghiz (ky), 1125 

Latin (la), 1201 

Lingala (ln), 1214 

Laotian (lo), 1215 

Lithuanian (lt), 1220 

Latvian (lv), 1222 

Malagasy (mg), 1307 

Maori (mi), 1309 

Macedonian (mk), 1311 

Malayalam (ml), 1312 

Mongolian (mn), 1314 

Moldavian (mo), 1315 

Marathi (mr), 1318 

Malay (ms), 1319 

Maltese (mt), 1320 

Burmese (my), 1325 

Nauru (na), 1401 

Nepali (ne), 1405 

Occitan (oc), 1503 

Oromo (om), 1513 

Oriya (or), 1518 

Panjabi (pa), 1601 

Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 

Quechua (qu), 1721 

Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 

Kirundi (rn), 1814 

Romanian (ro), 1815 

Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 

Sanskrit (sa), 1901 

Sindhi (sd), 1904 

Sangho (sg), 1907 

Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 

Sinhalese (si), 1909 

Slovak (sk), 1911 

Slovenian (sl), 1912 

Samoan (sm), 1913 

Shona (sn), 1914 

Somali (so), 1915 

Albanian (sq), 1917 

Serbian (sr), 1918 

Siswati (ss), 1919 

Sesotho (st), 1920 

Sundanese (su), 1921 

Swahili (sw), 1923 

Tamil (ta), 2001 

Telugu (te), 2005 

Tajik (tg), 2007 

Thai (th), 2008 

Tigrinya (ti), 2009 

Turkmen (tk), 2011 

Tagalog (tl), 2012 

Setswana (tn), 2014 

Tonga (to), 2015 

Turkish (tr), 2018 

Tsonga (ts), 2019 

Tatar (tt), 2020 

Twi (tw), 2023 

Ukrainian (uk), 2111 

Urdu (ur), 2118 

Uzbek (uz), 2126 

Vietnamese (vi), 2209 

Volapük (vo), 2215 

Wolof (wo), 2315 

Xhosa (xh), 2408 

Yoruba (yo), 2515 

Zulu (zu), 2621


Country/Area code list 

Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter 

Argentina, 0118, ar 

Australia, 0121, au 

Austria, 0120, at 

Belgium, 0205, be 

Brazil, 0218, br 

Canada, 0301, ca 

Chile, 0312, cl 

China, 0314, cn 

Denmark, 0411, dk 

Finland, 0609, fi 

France, 0618, fr 

Germany, 0405, de 

Hong Kong, 0811, hk 

India, 0914, in 

Indonesia, 0904, id 

Italy, 0920, it 

Japan, 1016, jp 

Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr 

Screen sizes and disc formats 

When viewing on a standard TV or monitor 

Malaysia, 1325, my 

Mexico, 1324, mx 

Netherlands, 1412, nl 

New Zealand, 1426, nz 

Norway, 1415, no 

Pakistan, 1611, pk 

Philippines, 1608, ph 

Portugal, 1620, pt 

Russian Federation, 1821, ru 

Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 

Singapore, 1907, sg 

Spain, 0519, es 

Sweden, 1905, se 

Switzerland, 0308, ch 

Taiwan, 2023, tw 

Thailand, 2008, th 

United Kingdom, 0702, gb 

USA, 2119, us 

16:9 4:3 (Letter Box) The programme is shown in widescreen with black bars 

at the top and bottom of the screen. 

4:3 4:3 (Letter Box) 

4:3 (Pan & Scan) 

When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor 

4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the programme are cropped so that the 

picture fills the whole screen. 

The programme is presented correctly on either setting. 

Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 

16:9 16:9 The programme is presented in widescreen. 

4:3 16:9 Your TV will determine how the picture is presented — 

check the manual that came with the TV for details. 

159 

En

16 

160 

En 


Handling discs 

When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave 

fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold 

the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge. 

Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and 

recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the 

label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the 

recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc 

becoming unusable. 

Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, 

etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly 

from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a 

circular motion. 

If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a 

commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a 

disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or 

other cleaning agents, including products designed for 

cleaning vinyl records. 

Storing discs 

Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl 

records, you should still take care to handle and store 

discs correctly. When you’re not using a disc, return it to 

its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in 

excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including 

under direct sunlight). 

Don’t glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a 

pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing 

instrument. These could all damage the disc. 

For more detailed care information see the instructions 

that come with discs. 

Do not load more than one disc into the recorder. 

Damaged discs 

Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can 

see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise 

damaged, don’t risk using it; you could end up damaging 

the recorder. 

This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully 

circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not 

recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all 

liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. 

Cleaning the pickup lens 

The HDD/DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in 

normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction 

due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneerauthorized 

service center. Although lens cleaners are 

commercially available, we do not recommend using 

them since some may damage the lens. 

Condensation 

Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is 

brought into a warm room from outside, or if the 

temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the 

condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may 

temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you 

should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for 

about an hour before switching on and using.


Hints on installation 

We want you to enjoy using this recorder for years to 

come, so please bear in mind the following points when 

choosing a suitable location for it: 

Do... 

Use in a well-ventilated room. 

Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, 

shelf or stereo rack. 

Don’t... 

Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or 

humidity, including near radiators and other heatgenerating 

appliances. 

Place on a window sill or other place where the 

recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight. 

Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room 

where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke. 

Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other 

component in your stereo system that becomes hot in 

use. 

Use near a television or monitor as you may 

experience interference — especially if the television 

uses an indoor antenna. 

Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder 

may be exposed to smoke or steam. 

Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth — 

this may prevent proper cooling of the unit. 

Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large 

enough to support all four of the unit’s feet. 

Moving the recorder 

If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if 

loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press STANDBY/ 

ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the 

POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at 

least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. 

Never lift or move the recorder during playback or 

recording — discs rotate at a high speed and may be 

damaged. 

Resetting the recorder 

If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory 

settings. 

1 Make sure that the recorder is on. 

2 Using the front panel controls, press and hold 

(Stop) and press STANDBY/ON. 

The recorder turns off with all settings reset. 

161 

En

16 

162 

En 


Specifications (DVR-LX60D) 

General 

Power requirements. . . . . . . . . .220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz 

Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 W 

Power consumption in standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . .0.69 W 

(Front panel display: off) 

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 kg 

Dimensions. . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 77 mm (H) x 288 mm (D) 

Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C 

Operating humidity . . . . . . .5 % to 85 % (no condensation) 

TV system . . . . . . . NTSC (external input only)/PAL/SECAM 

Readable discs 

DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, 

Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, 

CD-DA, DivX) 

Recording discs and formats 

DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode 

DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode 

DVD-RAM: VR mode 

DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode 

DVD+R DL: +VR mode 

Video recording format 

Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.5 MHz 

Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG 

Audio recording format 

Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz 

Compression format . . . . . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM 

(uncompressed) 

Recording time 

HDD (250 GB) 

XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 h 

Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 53 h 

Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h 

Long Play (LP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h 

Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 319 h 

Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 425 h 

Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 532 h 

Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 36 h to 711 h 

DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM 

Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 

Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h 

Long Play (LP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h 

Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h 

Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h 

Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 

(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only) 

Manual Mode (MN) 

DVD-R/-RW/-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 13 h 

DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 8 h 

DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL 

Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h 51 m 

Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 3 h 35 m 

Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 7 h 11 m 

Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 10 h 46 m 

Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 14 h 21 m 

Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 17 h 57 m 

(DVD-R DL only) 

Manual Mode (MN) 

DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h 

DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m 

Timer 

Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programmes 

Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display) 

Tuner (analog) 

Receivable channels 

Hyper 

UHF 

Hyper 

UHF 

SECAM B/G 

PAL B/G 

Frequency 

47 MHz to 89 MHz 

VHF (low) 

VHF (high) 104 MHz to 300 MHz 



SECAM L 

Frequency 


VHF (low) 

VHF (high) 104 MHz to 300 MHz 



Channel 

E2 to E4 

X to Z 

E5 to E12 

S1 to S20 

M1 to M10 

U1 to U10 

S21 to S41 

E21 to E69 

Channel 

FB, FC1, FC 

F1 to F6 

B to Q 

S21 to S41 

21 to 69 

PAL I 

Frequency 





SECAM D/K 

PAL D/K 

Frequency 





Channel 

A to C 

X to Z 

D to J 

11, 13 

S1 to S20 

S21 to S41 

E21 to E69 

Channel 

R1 to R5 

R6 to R12 

S1 to S20 

S21 to S41 

E21 to E69 

STEREO 

B/G - A2 

I - NICAM 

L - NICAM 

B/G - NICAM 

D/K - NICAM 

Tuner (digital) 

Receiving system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DVB-T (2 K/8 K COFDM) 

Tuner VHF/UHF . . . . . . VHF band III (174 MHz to 230 MHz) 

UHF band IV, V (470 MHz to 862 MHz) 

Auto Channel Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 ch, Auto Preset, 

Auto Label, Auto Sort 

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo MPEG layer I/II 

Audio Decoder 

. . . . . . . . .Sampling frequencies: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz 

This product’s digital tuner has been confirmed for use in the 

following countries: Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Spain, 

Denmark, Finland, Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland, UK.


Input/Output 

Antenna 

. . . . . . . . .75 Ω IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (analog) 

. . . . . . . . . 75 Ω IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (digital) 

Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front), 

Input 3 (rear) 

Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) 

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1), 

RCA jack (Input 2, Input 3) 

Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output 

Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) 

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1), 

RCA jack (Output) 

S-Video input . . AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front), Input 3 (rear) 

Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) 

C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 mVp-p (75 Ω) 


4 pin mini DIN (Input 2, Input 3) 

S-Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output 

Y (luminance) - Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) 

C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 mVp-p (75 Ω) 


4 pin mini DIN (Output) 

Component video output 

Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω) 

P B, P R: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) 

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA jacks 

RGB input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV2 (Input 1) 

Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) 

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (Input 1) 

RGB output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 

Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) 

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1) 

Audio input 

. . . . . . . . . . AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front), Input 3 (rear) L/R 

During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms 

(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ) 


RCA jacks (Input 2) 

Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output 

During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms 

(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ) 


RCA jacks (Output) 

Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack 

Digital audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial 

G-LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack 

Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA module 

DV input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin (front) 

(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard) 

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front) 

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin 

AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment) 

AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-pin connector 

This connector provides the video and audio signals for 

connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor. 

PIN no. AV1 (RGB)-TV / AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) 

1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out 

2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in 

11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in 

3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out 

6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in 

15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in 

4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 

17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 

7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in 

19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out 

20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .– / Video in or Y in 

8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status 

21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 

Supplied accessories 

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

AA/R6 dry cell batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 

Audio/Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

G-LINK cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

RF antenna cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 

Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject 

to change without notice, due to improvement. 

This product includes FontAvenue ® fonts licenced 

by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered 

trademark of NEC Corporation. 

Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission 

from Microsoft Corporation. 

163 

En

http://www.pioneer.co.uk 

http://www.pioneer.eu 

Published by Pioneer Corporation. 

Copyright © 2007 Pioneer Corporation. 

All rights reserved. 

PIONEER CORPORATION 

4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan 

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. 

P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 

PIONEER EUROPE NV 

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 

178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. 

Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En

RCS-LX60D - AWE Europe

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?